Part Number Hot Search : 
FD600 ZT485E 15SMC56A B0520 N4003 CPC1708J SIS990DN B019N
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download HD64F2602 Datasheet File
  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
　
 

  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 REJ09B0425-0100
16
H8S/2602 Group
Hardware Manual
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S Family/H8S/2600 Series H8S/2602 H8S/2601 HD64F2602 HD6432602 HD6432601
Rev.1.00 Revision Date: Jan. 21, 2008
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page ii of xxxii
Notes regarding these materials
1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page iii of xxxii
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins. The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the operation of the LSI is not guaranteed. 2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level. Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur. 3. Processing before Initialization Note: When power is first supplied, the product's state is undefined. The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately after the power supply has been turned on. 4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system's operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page iv of xxxii
Configuration of This Manual
This manual comprises the following items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Precautions on Handling of Product Configuration of This Manual Preface Contents Overview Description of Functional Modules * CPU and System-Control Modules * On-Chip Peripheral Modules The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the module. However, the generic style includes the following items: i) Feature ii) Input/Output Pin iii) Register Description iv) Operation v) Usage Note
When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the final part of each section. 7. List of Registers 8. Electrical Characteristics 9. Appendix 10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions) The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions. This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this manual. 11. Index
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page v of xxxii
Preface
The H8S/2602 Group are single-chip microcomputers made up of the high-speed H8S/2600 CPU as its core, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8S/2600 CPU has an instruction set that is compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2602 Group in the design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical characteristics of the H8S/2602 Group to the target users. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual: * In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics. * In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual. * In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 19, List of Registers. Examples: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial communication, is implemented on more than one channel: XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel number) Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Number notation: Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx, decimal is xxxx. Signal notation: An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site. Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page vi of xxxii
H8S/2602 Group manuals:
Document Title H8S/2602 Group Hardware Manual H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual Document No. This manual REJ09B0139
User's manuals for development tools:
Document Title H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop3 Tutorial H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop3 User's Manual Document No. REJ10B0058 ADE-702-037 REJ10B0024 REJ10B0026
All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page vii of xxxii
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page viii of xxxii
Contents
Section 1 Overview................................................................................................1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overview................................................................................................................................ 1 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 2 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................................... 3 Pin Functions ......................................................................................................................... 4
Section 2 CPU........................................................................................................9
2.1 Features.................................................................................................................................. 9 2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU ..................................... 10 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................... 11 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU............................................................................. 11 CPU Operating Modes......................................................................................................... 12 2.2.1 Normal Mode.......................................................................................................... 12 2.2.2 Advanced Mode...................................................................................................... 14 Address Space...................................................................................................................... 16 Register Configuration......................................................................................................... 17 2.4.1 General Registers.................................................................................................... 18 2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) ............................................................................................ 19 2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) .......................................................................... 19 2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR)............................................................................. 20 2.4.5 Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)................................................................... 21 2.4.6 Initial Values of CPU Registers .............................................................................. 21 Data Formats........................................................................................................................ 22 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................... 22 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ............................................................................................ 24 Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................... 25 2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................... 26 2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................... 36 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation........................................................ 37 2.7.1 Register Direct--Rn ............................................................................................... 37 2.7.2 Register Indirect--@ERn ....................................................................................... 37 2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)................. 38 2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn..... 38 2.7.5 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32....................................... 38 2.7.6 Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32.................................................................... 39 2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)....................................... 39
2.2
2.3 2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page ix of xxxii
2.8 2.9
2.7.8 Memory Indirect--@@aa:8 ................................................................................... 40 2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation ................................................................................ 41 Processing States.................................................................................................................. 43 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 44 2.9.1 Usage Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions ....................................................... 44
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ....................................................................... 45
3.1 3.2 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................................... 45 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 45 3.2.1 Mode Control Register(MDCR) ............................................................................. 46 3.2.2 System Control Register(SYSCR).......................................................................... 47 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................... 48 3.3.1 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................... 48 Address Map ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.3 3.4
Section 4 Exception Handling ............................................................................. 51
4.1 4.2 4.3 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................................... 51 Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table .................................................................. 51 Reset .................................................................................................................................... 53 4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling ...................................................................................... 53 4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................... 56 4.3.3 State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release .................................... 56 Traces................................................................................................................................... 57 Interrupts.............................................................................................................................. 57 Trap Instruction.................................................................................................................... 58 Stack Status after Exception Handling................................................................................. 59 Usage Note........................................................................................................................... 60
4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8
Section 5 Interrupt Controller.............................................................................. 61
5.1 5.2 5.3 Features................................................................................................................................ 61 Input/Output Pins................................................................................................................. 63 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 63 5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to H, J, K, M (IPRA to IPRH, IPRJ, IPRK, IPRM)...................................................................... 64 5.3.2 IRQ Enable Register (IER) ..................................................................................... 65 5.3.3 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)........................................ 66 5.3.4 IRQ Status Register (ISR)....................................................................................... 68 Interrupt ............................................................................................................................... 69 5.4.1 External Interrupts .................................................................................................. 69 5.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................... 70
5.4
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page x of xxxii
5.5 5.6
5.7
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table......................................................................... 70 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................................ 73 5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ........................................................................................ 73 5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2 ........................................................................................ 75 5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ................................................................. 77 5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................... 79 5.6.5 DTC Activation by Interrupt................................................................................... 80 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 81 5.7.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling........................................ 81 5.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ......................................................................... 82 5.7.3 When Interrupts are Disabled ................................................................................. 82 5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction............................................. 82
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) .................................................................83
6.1 6.2 Features................................................................................................................................ 83 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 85 6.2.1 Break Address Register A (BARA) ........................................................................ 85 6.2.2 Break Address Register B (BARB) ........................................................................ 85 6.2.3 Break Control Register A (BCRA) ......................................................................... 86 6.2.4 Break Control Register B (BCRB).......................................................................... 86 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 87 6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch .......................................................... 87 6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access.................................................................. 87 6.3.3 Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling ................................................................... 88 6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes ................................................... 88 6.3.5 When Instruction Execution is Delayed by One State ............................................ 89 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 90 6.4.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ..................................................................................... 90 6.4.2 PC Break Interrupts ................................................................................................ 90 6.4.3 CMFA and CMFB .................................................................................................. 90 6.4.4 PC Break Interrupt when DTC is Bus Master......................................................... 90 6.4.5 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS Instruction............................................... 90 6.4.6 I Bit Set by LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC Instruction .......................................... 91 6.4.7 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following Bcc Instruction............. 91 6.4.8 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Branch Destination Address of Bcc Instruction...................................................... 91
6.3
6.4
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xi of xxxii
Section 7 Bus Controller ..................................................................................... 93
7.1 Basic Timing........................................................................................................................ 93 7.1.1 On-Chip Memory Access Timing (ROM, RAM) ................................................... 93 7.1.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Timing........................................................... 94 Bus Arbitration .................................................................................................................... 94 7.2.1 Order of Priority of the Bus Masters....................................................................... 94 7.2.2 Bus Transfer Timing............................................................................................... 95
7.2
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC).......................................................... 97
8.1 8.2 Features................................................................................................................................ 97 Register Configuration......................................................................................................... 99 8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................. 100 8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB).............................................................................. 101 8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR)................................................................... 101 8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)........................................................... 101 8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)................................................................ 102 8.2.6 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER).......................................................................... 102 8.2.7 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)......................................................................... 103 Activation Sources............................................................................................................. 104 Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table ................................................. 105 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 108 8.5.1 Normal Mode........................................................................................................ 109 8.5.2 Repeat Mode......................................................................................................... 110 8.5.3 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 111 8.5.4 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 113 8.5.5 Interrupts............................................................................................................... 114 8.5.6 Operation Timing.................................................................................................. 114 8.5.7 Number of DTC Execution States ........................................................................ 115 Procedures for Using DTC................................................................................................. 117 8.6.1 Activation by Interrupt.......................................................................................... 117 8.6.2 Activation by Software ......................................................................................... 117 Examples of Use of the DTC ............................................................................................. 118 8.7.1 Normal Mode........................................................................................................ 118 8.7.2 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 119 8.7.3 Software Activation .............................................................................................. 120 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 121 8.8.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 121 8.8.2 On-Chip RAM ...................................................................................................... 121 8.8.3 DTCE Bit Setting.................................................................................................. 121
8.3 8.4 8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xii of xxxii
Section 9 I/O Ports .............................................................................................123
9.1 Port 1.................................................................................................................................. 126 9.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR).............................................................. 126 9.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)................................................................................. 127 9.1.3 Port 1 Register (PORT1)....................................................................................... 127 9.1.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 128 Port 4.................................................................................................................................. 131 9.2.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4)....................................................................................... 131 Port 9.................................................................................................................................. 132 9.3.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9)....................................................................................... 132 Port A................................................................................................................................. 133 9.4.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) ............................................................ 133 9.4.2 Port A Data Register (PADR)............................................................................... 134 9.4.3 Port A Register (PORTA)..................................................................................... 134 9.4.4 Port A Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PAPCR) ................................................. 135 9.4.5 Port A Open-Drain Control Register (PAODR) ................................................... 135 9.4.6 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 136 Port B ................................................................................................................................. 137 9.5.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) ............................................................ 137 9.5.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) ............................................................................... 138 9.5.3 Port B Register (PORTB) ..................................................................................... 138 9.5.4 Port B Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PBPCR) ................................................. 139 9.5.5 Port B Open-Drain Control Register (PBODR).................................................... 139 9.5.6 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 140 Port C ................................................................................................................................. 143 9.6.1 Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR) ............................................................ 143 9.6.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR) ............................................................................... 144 9.6.3 Port C Register (PORTC) ..................................................................................... 144 9.6.4 Port C Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PCPCR) ................................................. 145 9.6.5 Port C Open-Drain Control Register (PCODR).................................................... 145 9.6.6 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 146 Port D................................................................................................................................. 148 9.7.1 Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR) ............................................................ 148 9.7.2 Port D Data Register (PDDR)............................................................................... 148 9.7.3 Port D Register (PORTD)..................................................................................... 149 9.7.4 Port D Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PDPCR) ................................................. 149 Port F ................................................................................................................................. 150 9.8.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR) ............................................................. 150 9.8.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR) ................................................................................ 151 9.8.3 Port F Register (PORTF) ...................................................................................... 151
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xiii of xxxii
9.2 9.3 9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.8.4
Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 152
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) ....................................................... 155
10.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 155 10.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 159 10.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 160 10.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR).............................................................................. 162 10.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)............................................................................. 167 10.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)...................................................................... 169 10.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)............................................................... 186 10.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................. 188 10.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 191 10.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................. 191 10.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ................................................................................ 191 10.3.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) .......................................................................... 192 10.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 193 10.4.1 Basic Functions..................................................................................................... 193 10.4.2 Synchronous Operation......................................................................................... 199 10.4.3 Buffer Operation................................................................................................... 201 10.4.4 Cascaded Operation .............................................................................................. 205 10.4.5 PWM Modes......................................................................................................... 207 10.4.6 Phase Counting Mode........................................................................................... 212 10.5 Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 219 10.6 DTC Activation.................................................................................................................. 221 10.7 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................................. 221 10.8 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 222 10.8.1 Input/Output Timing............................................................................................. 222 10.8.2 Interrupt Signal Timing ........................................................................................ 226 10.9 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 230 10.9.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 230 10.9.2 Input Clock Restrictions ....................................................................................... 230 10.9.3 Caution on Period Setting ..................................................................................... 231 10.9.4 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations...................................... 231 10.9.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations............................... 232 10.9.6 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match.......................................... 233 10.9.7 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match ......................... 234 10.9.8 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture............................................... 235 10.9.9 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture.............................................. 236 10.9.10 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture ............................. 237 10.9.11 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing......................... 238
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xiv of xxxii
10.9.12 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow................................ 239 10.9.13 Multiplexing of I/O Pins ....................................................................................... 239 10.9.14 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode........................................................................... 239
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) ............................................241
11.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 241 11.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 243 11.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 243 11.3.1 Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL) ......................................... 244 11.3.2 Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL)................................................... 245 11.3.3 Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL) .......................................................... 246 11.3.4 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) .................................................................... 249 11.3.5 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) ...................................................................... 250 11.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 251 11.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 251 11.4.2 Output Timing....................................................................................................... 252 11.4.3 Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output............................................... 253 11.4.4 Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output)........... 254 11.4.5 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................................................................. 255 11.4.6 Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output ............................... 257 11.4.7 Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Output)................... 258 11.4.8 Inverted Pulse Output ........................................................................................... 260 11.4.9 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture ............................................................. 261 11.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 261 11.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 261 11.5.2 Operation of Pulse Output Pins............................................................................. 261
Section 12 Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................263
12.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 263 12.2 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 264 12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 264 12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................. 265 12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)............................................................. 267 12.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 268 12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ......................................................................................... 268 12.3.2 Interval Timer Mode............................................................................................. 268 12.4 Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 269 12.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 269 12.5.1 Notes on Register Access...................................................................................... 269
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xv of xxxii
12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6
Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment ...................... 271 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 ...................................................................... 271 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................. 271 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode.............................................................. 272 OVF Flag Clearing in Intervel Timer Mode ......................................................... 272
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)............................................ 273
13.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 273 13.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 275 13.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 275 13.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ............................................................................... 276 13.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)............................................................................... 276 13.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................. 276 13.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................. 276 13.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................ 277 13.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) .............................................................................. 281 13.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................. 284 13.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)..................................................................... 290 13.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ....................................................................................... 291 13.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ..................................................................................... 298 13.4.1 Data Transfer Format............................................................................................ 298 13.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode ........................................................... 300 13.4.3 Clock..................................................................................................................... 301 13.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode).............................................................. 302 13.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) ........................................................... 303 13.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) ...................................................... 305 13.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function.......................................................................... 309 13.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................. 310 13.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................. 312 13.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ......................................................................... 315 13.6.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 315 13.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode).................................................. 316 13.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ..................................... 317 13.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .......................................... 320 13.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .............................................................................. 322 13.7 Operation in Smart Card Interface ..................................................................................... 324 13.7.1 Pin Connection Example ...................................................................................... 324 13.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode)................................................... 325
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xvi of xxxii
13.7.3 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 326 13.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode................................................. 327 13.7.5 Initialization .......................................................................................................... 328 13.7.6 Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode)......................................... 329 13.7.7 Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode) .................................... 332 13.7.8 Clock Output Control............................................................................................ 334 13.8 Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 335 13.8.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode ............................... 335 13.8.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode .............................................................. 336 13.9 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 338 13.9.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 338 13.9.2 Break Detection and Processing ........................................................................... 338 13.9.3 Mark State and Break Detection ........................................................................... 338 13.9.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) ..................................................................... 338 13.9.5 Restrictions on Using DTC................................................................................... 339 13.9.6 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions ............................................................. 339 13.9.7 Notes when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin................................................. 343
Section 14 A/D Converter..................................................................................345
14.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 345 14.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 347 14.3 Register Description........................................................................................................... 348 14.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) .............................................. 348 14.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................ 349 14.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................. 351 14.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 352 14.4.1 Single Mode.......................................................................................................... 352 14.4.2 Scan Mode ............................................................................................................ 352 14.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .......................................................... 353 14.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................. 355 14.5 Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 355 14.6 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions............................................................................... 356 14.7 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 358 14.7.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 358 14.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .................................................................. 358 14.7.3 Influences on Absolute Precision.......................................................................... 358 14.7.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings....................................... 359 14.7.5 Notes on Board Design ......................................................................................... 359
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xvii of xxxii
14.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures ......................................................................... 360
Section 15 RAM ................................................................................................ 363 Section 16 ROM ................................................................................................ 365
16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 Features.............................................................................................................................. 365 Mode Transitions ............................................................................................................... 366 Block Configuration .......................................................................................................... 370 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 371 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 371 16.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) ..................................................... 371 16.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) ..................................................... 373 16.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ............................................................................ 373 16.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................ 374 16.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER).................................................................... 374 On-Board Programming Modes......................................................................................... 375 16.6.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................ 376 16.6.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode...................................................... 378 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM .................................................................................... 380 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing................................................................................ 382 16.8.1 Program/Program-Verify ...................................................................................... 382 16.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify................................................................................................ 384 16.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory........................... 384 Program/Erase Protection .................................................................................................. 386 16.9.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................. 386 16.9.2 Software Protection .............................................................................................. 386 16.9.3 Error Protection .................................................................................................... 386 Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................. 387 Power-Down States for Flash Memory.............................................................................. 387 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version ................................... 388
16.6
16.7 16.8
16.9
16.10 16.11 16.12
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator..................................................................... 389
17.1 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 390 17.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ............................................................ 390 17.1.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ............................................................ 391 17.2 Oscillator............................................................................................................................ 392 17.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator............................................................................ 392 17.2.2 External Clock Input............................................................................................. 393 17.3 PLL Circuit ........................................................................................................................ 395 17.4 Medium-Speed Clock Divider ........................................................................................... 396
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xviii of xxxii
17.5 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit................................................................................... 396 17.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 396 17.6.1 Note on Crystal Resonator .................................................................................... 396 17.6.2 Note on Board Design........................................................................................... 396
Section 18 Power-Down Modes ........................................................................399
18.1 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 402 18.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ..................................................................... 402 18.1.2 Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC).................... 404 18.2 Medium-Speed Mode......................................................................................................... 405 18.3 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................ 407 18.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode...................................................................................... 407 18.3.2 Clearing Sleep Mode ............................................................................................ 407 18.4 Software Standby Mode..................................................................................................... 408 18.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode .................................................................. 408 18.4.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode ......................................................................... 408 18.4.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode.... 409 18.4.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example..................................................... 410 18.5 Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................................... 411 18.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................. 411 18.5.2 Clearing Hardware Standby Mode........................................................................ 411 18.5.3 Hardware Standby Mode Timings ........................................................................ 412 18.6 Module Stop Mode ............................................................................................................ 413 18.7 Clock Output Disabling Function ................................................................................... 413 18.8 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 414 18.8.1 I/O Port Status....................................................................................................... 414 18.8.2 Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period ........................ 414 18.8.3 DTC Module Stop................................................................................................. 414 18.8.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt................................................................... 414 18.8.5 Writing to MSTPCR ............................................................................................. 414
Section 19 List of Registers ...............................................................................415
19.1 Register Addresses............................................................................................................. 416 19.2 Register Bits....................................................................................................................... 422 19.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode ........................................................................... 427
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................433
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................. 433 20.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................. 434 20.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................. 437
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xix of xxxii
20.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 437 20.3.2 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 439 20.3.3 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules.............................................................. 441 20.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ........................................................................................ 445 20.5 Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................... 446
Appendix
A. B. C.
......................................................................................................... 449
I/O Port States in Each Pin State........................................................................................ 449 Product Code Lineup ......................................................................................................... 450 Package Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 451
Index
......................................................................................................... 453
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xx of xxxii
Figures
Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 2 Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement............................................................................................................ 3 Section 2 CPU Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)..................................................................... 13 Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode ................................................................................. 13 Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)................................................................. 14 Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode ............................................................................. 15 Figure 2.5 Memory Map............................................................................................................... 16 Figure 2.6 CPU Registers ............................................................................................................. 17 Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers ......................................................................................... 18 Figure 2.8 Stack............................................................................................................................ 19 Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1).............................................................................. 22 Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2).............................................................................. 23 Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................... 24 Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) ................................................................................ 36 Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ......................................... 40 Figure 2.13 State Transitions ........................................................................................................ 44 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Figure 3.1 Address Map ............................................................................................................... 49 Section 4 Exception Handling Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Enabled)............................... 54 Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Disabled: Cannot be Used in this LSI) ....................................................................................... 55 Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................ 59 Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value is Odd................................................................................ 60 Interrupt Controller Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller........................................................................ 62 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 ................................................................ 69 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 ............................................................................................ 74 Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Control Mode 2..................... 76 Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling ...................................................................................... 78 Figure 5.6 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling ............................................ 81 Section 5 Figure 5.1 Figure 5.2 Figure 5.3
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxi of xxxii
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller ...................................................................... 84 Figure 6.2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions ............................................................. 88 Section 7 Bus Controller Figure 7.1 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle.................................................................................. 93 Figure 7.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle.................................................................. 94 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC ............................................................................................... 98 Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control .................................................. 104 Figure 8.3 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information ............... 105 Figure 8.4 Flowchart of DTC Operation .................................................................................... 108 Figure 8.5 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode .......................................................................... 109 Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode ........................................................................... 110 Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode .............................................................. 112 Figure 8.8 Chain Transfer Operation.......................................................................................... 113 Figure 8.9 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode) ..................... 114 Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2) .............................................................................................. 115 Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer) ............................................ 115 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU............................................................................................ 158 Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure .................................................. 193 Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................ 194 Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation..................................................................................... 195 Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match.............. 195 Figure 10.6 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation ............................................................... 196 Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation ..................................................................... 196 Figure 10.8 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure ......................................... 197 Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation ...................................................................... 198 Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure ........................................ 199 Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation...................................................................... 200 Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation......................................................................... 201 Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation............................................................................. 202 Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure................................................... 202 Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1) .......................................................................... 203 Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2) .......................................................................... 204 Figure 10.17 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure ................................................................. 205 Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)...................................................................... 206
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxii of xxxii
Figure 10.19 Figure 10.20 Figure 10.21 Figure 10.22 Figure 10.23 Figure 10.24 Figure 10.25 Figure 10.26 Figure 10.27 Figure 10.28 Figure 10.29 Figure 10.30 Figure 10.31 Figure 10.32 Figure 10.33 Figure 10.34 Figure 10.35 Figure 10.36 Figure 10.37 Figure 10.38 Figure 10.39 Figure 10.40 Figure 10.41 Figure 10.42 Figure 10.43 Figure 10.44 Figure 10.45 Figure 10.46 Figure 10.47 Figure 10.48 Figure 10.49 Figure 10.50 Figure 10.51 Figure 10.52 Figure 10.53 Section 11 Figure 11.1 Figure 11.2 Figure 11.3 Figure 11.4
Example of Cascaded Operation (2)...................................................................... 206 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure .......................................................... 209 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) ................................................................. 210 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) ................................................................. 210 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) ................................................................. 211 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure........................................... 213 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation .................................................... 213 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation .................................................... 214 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation .................................................... 215 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation .................................................... 216 Phase Counting Mode Application Example......................................................... 218 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation............................................................ 222 Count Timing in External Clock Operation........................................................... 222 Output Compare Output Timing ........................................................................... 223 Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................ 223 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) .............................................................. 224 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) .................................................................. 224 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match).......................................................... 225 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) ............................................................. 225 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) ............................................................... 226 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) ................................................................... 227 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 228 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 229 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU .............................................................. 229 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC Activation ............................................ 230 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode ................ 231 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations....................................... 232 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ............................... 233 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match........................................... 234 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match .......................... 235 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture ............................................... 236 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture .............................................. 237 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture.............................. 238 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing............................................ 239 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow................................................... 240 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Block Diagram of PPG............................................................................................ 242 PPG Output Operation............................................................................................. 251 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example) ................................. 252 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)............................................. 253
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxiii of xxxii
Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) ..................................... 254 Figure 11.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output ............................................................................... 255 Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing ............................................. 256 Figure 11.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)............................. 257 Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)................ 258 Figure 11.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example) .......................................................................... 260 Figure 11.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)............................................ 261 Section 12 Figure 12.1 Figure 12.2 Figure 12.3 Watchdog Timer Block Diagram of WDT .......................................................................................... 264 Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (Example for WDT0) .............................. 270 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment.................................................... 271
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI............................................................................................. 274 Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ................................................. 298 Figure 13.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ........................................ 300 Figure 13.4 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) ............................................................................................ 301 Figure 13.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ....................................................................... 302 Figure 13.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ................................................... 303 Figure 13.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................... 304 Figure 13.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ................................................... 305 Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) .......................................................... 307 Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) .......................................................... 308 Figure 13.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)............................................ 310 Figure 13.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................ 311 Figure 13.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) ............................. 312 Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................ 313 Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................ 314 Figure 13.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) ............................ 315 Figure 13.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ..................................................................... 316 Figure 13.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode .................. 318 Figure 13.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................. 319 Figure 13.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception ............................................................... 320 Figure 13.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart ...................................................................... 321
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxiv of xxxii
Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations ............................................................................................... 323 Figure 13.21 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections.............................. 324 Figure 13.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format ........................................................... 325 Figure 13.23 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0) ...................................................... 325 Figure 13.24 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)..................................................... 326 Figure 13.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode (Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate) ..................................................... 328 Figure 13.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode......................................................... 330 Figure 13.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation.................................. 330 Figure 13.28 Example of Transmission Processing Flow........................................................... 331 Figure 13.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode .......................................................... 332 Figure 13.30 Example of Reception Processing Flow................................................................ 333 Figure 13.31 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level.................................................................. 334 Figure 13.32 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure ......................................................................... 335 Figure 13.33 Sample Transmission using DTC in Clocked Synchronous Mode........................ 339 Figure 13.34 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission............................... 340 Figure 13.35 Pin States during Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Internal Clock)..................................................................................................... 340 Figure 13.36 Pin States during Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode (Internal Clock)..................................................................................................... 341 Figure 13.37 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception .................................... 342 Figure 13.38 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin........................................... 343 Figure 13.39 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin (Example of Preventing Low-Level Output) ........................................................ 344 Section 14 Figure 14.1 Figure 14.2 Figure 14.3 Figure 14.4 Figure 14.5 Figure 14.6 Figure 14.7 Figure 14.8 Section 16 Figure 16.1 Figure 16.2 Figure 16.3 Figure 16.4 A/D Converter Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 346 A/D Conversion Timing .......................................................................................... 353 External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 355 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions .................................................................... 357 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions .................................................................... 357 Example of Analog Input Circuit ............................................................................ 359 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit ........................................................... 360 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit ....................................................................... 361 ROM Block Diagram of Flash Memory............................................................................ 366 Flash Memory State Transitions.............................................................................. 367 Boot Mode............................................................................................................... 368 User Program Mode ................................................................................................ 369
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxv of xxxii
Figure 16.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration........................................................................ 370 Figure 16.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode ........................ 379 Figure 16.7 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ................................................... 380 Figure 16.8 Example of RAM Overlap Operation...................................................................... 381 Figure 16.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ....................................................................... 383 Figure 16.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ............................................................................... 385 Section 17 Figure 17.1 Figure 17.2 Figure 17.3 Figure 17.4 Figure 17.5 Figure 17.6 Figure 17.7 Section 18 Figure 18.1 Figure 18.2 Figure 18.3 Figure 18.4 Figure 18.5 Clock Pulse Generator Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ............................................................... 389 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)........................................................... 392 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit...................................................................... 392 External Clock Input (Examples) ............................................................................ 393 External Clock Input Timing................................................................................... 394 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit ............................................................ 396 External Circuitry Recommended for PLL Circuit ................................................. 397 Power-Down Modes Mode Transition Diagram ....................................................................................... 400 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing ........................................ 406 Software Standby Mode Application Example ....................................................... 410 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode .................................................. 412 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode............................................... 412
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics Figure 20.1 Output Load Circuit ................................................................................................ 437 Figure 20.2 System Clock Timing.............................................................................................. 438 Figure 20.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing.............................................................................. 438 Figure 20.4 Reset Input Timing.................................................................................................. 440 Figure 20.5 Interrupt Input Timing............................................................................................. 440 Figure 20.6 I/O Port Input/Output Timing.................................................................................. 442 Figure 20.7 TPU Input/Output Timing ....................................................................................... 443 Figure 20.8 TPU Clock Input Timing......................................................................................... 443 Figure 20.9 SCK Clock Input Timing ........................................................................................ 443 Figure 20.10 SCI Input/Output Timing (Clock Synchronous Mode) ......................................... 444 Figure 20.11 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing...................................................... 444 Figure 20.12 PPG Output Timing............................................................................................... 444 Appendix Figure C.1 Package Dimensions................................................................................................. 451
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxvi of xxxii
Tables
Section 2 CPU Table 2.1 Instruction Classification ........................................................................................ 25 Table 2.2 Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 26 Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions....................................................................................... 27 Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions......................................................................... 28 Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions................................................................................. 30 Table 2.6 Shift Instructions..................................................................................................... 30 Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions ................................................................................. 31 Table 2.8 Branch Instructions ................................................................................................. 33 Table 2.9 System Control Instructions.................................................................................... 34 Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions ............................................................................ 35 Table 2.11 Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 37 Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges ........................................................................... 39 Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation ................................................................................ 41 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection ............................................................................ 45 Table 3.2 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................... 48 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority.................................................................................. 51 Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table........................................................................... 52 Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling....................................... 57 Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling...................... 58 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 63 Table 5.2 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities................................. 71 Table 5.3 Interrupt Control Modes ......................................................................................... 73 Table 5.4 Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................... 79 Table 5.5 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Status ........................ 80 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.1 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs............... 106 Table 8.2 Register Information in Normal Mode.................................................................. 109 Table 8.3 Register Information in Repeat Mode................................................................... 110 Table 8.4 Register Information in Block Transfer Mode...................................................... 111 Table 8.5 DTC Execution Status........................................................................................... 116 Table 8.6 Number of States Required for Each Execution Status......................................... 116
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxvii of xxxii
Section 9 I/O Ports Table 9.1 Port Functions....................................................................................................... 124 Table 9.2 P17 Pin Function................................................................................................... 128 Table 9.3 P16 Pin Function................................................................................................... 128 Table 9.4 P15 Pin Function................................................................................................... 129 Table 9.5 P14 Pin Function................................................................................................... 129 Table 9.6 P13 Pin Function................................................................................................... 129 Table 9.7 P12 Pin Function................................................................................................... 130 Table 9.8 P11 Pin Function................................................................................................... 130 Table 9.9 P10 Pin Function................................................................................................... 130 Table 9.10 PA3 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 136 Table 9.11 PA2 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 136 Table 9.12 PA1 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 136 Table 9.13 PA0 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 136 Table 9.14 PB7 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 140 Table 9.15 PB6 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 140 Table 9.16 PB5 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 141 Table 9.17 PB4 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 141 Table 9.18 PB3 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 141 Table 9.19 PB2 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 142 Table 9.20 PB1 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 142 Table 9.21 PB0 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 142 Table 9.22 PC7 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 146 Table 9.23 PC6 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 146 Table 9.24 PC5 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 146 Table 9.25 PC4 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 146 Table 9.26 PC3 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 146 Table 9.27 PC2 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 147 Table 9.28 PC1 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 147 Table 9.29 PC0 Pin function................................................................................................... 147 Table 9.30 PF7 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 152 Table 9.31 PF6 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 152 Table 9.32 PF5 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 152 Table 9.33 PF4 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 152 Table 9.34 PF3 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 152 Table 9.35 PF2 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 153 Table 9.36 PF1 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 153 Table 9.37 PF0 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 153
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxviii of xxxii
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.1 TPU Functions ...................................................................................................... 156 Table 10.2 TPU Pins............................................................................................................... 159 Table 10.3 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (channels 0 and 3) .................................................................. 163 Table 10.4 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (channels 1, 2, 4, and 5) ......................................................... 163 Table 10.5 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (channel 0) ............................................................................... 164 Table 10.6 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (channel 1) ............................................................................... 164 Table 10.7 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (channel 2) ............................................................................... 165 Table 10.8 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (channel 3) ............................................................................... 165 Table 10.9 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (channel 4) ............................................................................... 166 Table 10.10 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (channel 5) ........................................................................... 166 Table 10.11 MD0 to MD3 .................................................................................................... 168 Table 10.12 TIORH_0 (channel 0) ....................................................................................... 170 Table 10.13 TIORL_0 (channel 0)........................................................................................ 171 Table 10.14 TIOR_1 (channel 1) .......................................................................................... 172 Table 10.15 TIOR_2 (channel 2) .......................................................................................... 173 Table 10.16 TIORH_3 (channel 3) ....................................................................................... 174 Table 10.17 TIORL_3 (channel 3)........................................................................................ 175 Table 10.18 TIOR_4 (channel 4) .......................................................................................... 176 Table 10.19 TIOR_5 (channel 5) .......................................................................................... 177 Table 10.20 TIORH_0 (channel 0) ....................................................................................... 178 Table 10.21 TIORL_0 (channel 0)........................................................................................ 179 Table 10.22 TIOR_1 (channel 1) .......................................................................................... 180 Table 10.23 TIOR_2 (channel 2) .......................................................................................... 181 Table 10.24 TIORH_3 (channel 3) ....................................................................................... 182 Table 10.25 TIORL_3 (channel 3)........................................................................................ 183 Table 10.26 TIOR_4 (channel 4) .......................................................................................... 184 Table 10.27 TIOR_5 (channel 5) .......................................................................................... 185 Table 10.28 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation ..................................................... 201 Table 10.29 Cascaded Combinations.................................................................................... 205 Table 10.30 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins .......................................................... 208 Table 10.31 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins ........................................................... 212 Table 10.32 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1.................................. 214 Table 10.33 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2.................................. 215 Table 10.34 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3.................................. 216 Table 10.35 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4.................................. 217 Table 10.36 TPU Interrupts .................................................................................................. 220
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxix of xxxii
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Table 11.1 PPG I/O Pins......................................................................................................... 243 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Table 12.1 WDT Interrupt Source .......................................................................................... 269 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 275 Table 13.2 Relationships between the N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B............................... 291 Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)................................. 292 Table 13.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) .......................... 294 Table 13.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) ................ 295 Table 13.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)..................... 296 Table 13.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .............................................................................. 296 Table 13.8 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode) (When n = 0 and S = 372)...................................... 297 Table 13.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (When S = 372) ..................................................... 297 Table 13.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)................................................ 299 Table 13.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling .................................................. 306 Table 13.12 SCI Interrupt Sources........................................................................................ 336 Table 13.13 SCI Interrupt Sources........................................................................................ 336 Section 14 A/D Converter Table 14.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 347 Table 14.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers .............................. 349 Table 14.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)................................................................... 354 Table 14.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) ..................................................................... 354 Table 14.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Source............................................................................ 355 Table 14.6 Analog Pin Specifications..................................................................................... 361 Section 16 ROM Table 16.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .................................. 367 Table 16.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 371 Table 16.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes ............................................................... 375 Table 16.4 Boot Mode Operation ........................................................................................... 377 Table 16.5 System Clock Frequencies for Which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate Is Possible ........................................................................................ 377 Table 16.6 Flash Memory Operating States............................................................................ 387 Table 16.7 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version.............................................................................................. 388
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxx of xxxii
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator Table 17.1 Damping Resistance Value ................................................................................... 392 Table 17.2 Crystal Resonator Characteristics ......................................................................... 393 Table 17.3 External Clock Input Conditions........................................................................... 394 Section 18 Power-Down Modes Table 18.1 Low Power Dissipation Mode Transition Conditions........................................... 399 Table 18.2 LSI Internal States in Each Mode ......................................................................... 401 Table 18.3 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings................................................................. 409 Table 18.4 Pin State in Each Processing State..................................................................... 413 Section 20 Electrical Characteristics Table 20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 433 Table 20.2 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 434 Table 20.3 Permissible Output Currents ................................................................................. 436 Table 20.4 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 437 Table 20.5 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 439 Table 20.6 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules.............................................................. 441 Table 20.7 A/D Conversion Characteristics............................................................................ 445 Table 20.8 Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 446
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxxi of xxxii
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page xxxii of xxxii
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1 Overview
* High-speed H8S/2600 central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs on an object level Sixteen 16-bit general registers 69 basic instructions * Various peripheral functions PC break controller (PBC) Data transfer controller (DTC) 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) Programmable pulse generator (PPG) Watchdog timer (WDT) Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface (SCI) 10-bit A/D converter Clock pulse generator * On-chip memory
ROM F-ZTAT version Mask ROM version Model HD64F2602 HD6432602 HD6432601 ROM 128 kbytes 128 kbytes 64 kbytes RAM 4 kbytes 4 kbytes 4 kbytes Remarks
* General I/O ports I/O pins: 43 Input-only pins: 13 * Supports various power-down states * Compact package
Package 80-pin QFP Code FP-80Q/FP-80QV Body Size 14.0 Pin Pitch 0.65 mm
x 14.0 mm
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 1 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
1.2
Block Diagram
VCL VCL VCC VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS
PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
Port D
Internal address bus
Internal data bus
H8S/2600 CPU
Bus controller
Peripheral data bus
NMI
Interrupt controller PC break controller (2 channels)
DTC
PF7/ PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF2 PF1 PF0/IRQ2
Peripheral address bus
Port B Port C Port 9
MD2 MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL PLLVCL PLLCAP PLLVSS STBY RES FWE/NC*
Clock pulse generator
PA3/SCK2 PA2/RxD2 PA1/TxD2 PA0
PLL
Port A
WDTx1 channel
RAM
PB7/TIOCB5 PB6/TIOCA5 PB5/TIOCB4 PB4/TIOCA4 PB3/TIOCD3 PB2/TIOCC3 PB1/TIOCB3 PB0/TIOCA3 PC7 PC6 PC5/SCK1/IRQ5 PC4/RxD1 PC3/TxD1 PC2/SCK0/IRQ4 PC1/RxD0 PC0/TxD0
Port F
ROM (mask ROM, flash memory*)
SCIx3 channels
TPU
A/D converter
PPG
P93 / AN11 P92 / AN10 P91 / AN9 P90 / AN8
Port 1
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0 P10/PO8/TIOCA0 AVCC AVSS
Port 4
P47/AN7 P46/AN6 P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3 P42/AN2 P41/AN1 P40/AN0
Note: * The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. The NC pin is provided only in the mask ROM versions.
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 2 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
1.3
Pin Arrangement
PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 VCL FWE/NC* Vss EXTAL Vcc XTAL PLLVss STBY PLLVCL NMI PLLCAP RES
AVcc P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 P47/AN7 P46/AN6 P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3 P42/AN2 P41/AN1 P40/AN0 AVss P10/PO8/TIOCA0 Vcc P11/PO9/TIOCB0 Vss P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA VCL
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
H8S/2602 Group PRQP008JD-A FP-80Q/FP-80QV (TOP VIEW)
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
MD2 MD1 MD0 PA3/SCK2 PA2/RxD2 PA1/TxD2 PA0 PB7/TIOCB5 PB6/TIOCA5 PB5/TIOCB4 PB4/TIOCA4 PB3/TIOCD3 PB2/TIOCC3 Vcc PB1/TIOCB3 Vss PB0/TIOCA3 PC7 PC6 PC5/SCK1/IRQ5
Note: * The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version. The NC pin is used only in the mask ROM versions.
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD NC NC PF0/IRQ2 PF1 PF2 PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF4 PF5 PF6 PF7/ PC0/TxD0 PC1/RxD0 PC2/SCK0/IRQ4 PC3/TxD1 PC4/RxD1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 3 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
1.4
Type Power Supply
Pin Functions
Symbol VCC Pin NO. 27 48 76 25 50 78 52 80 44 I/O Input Function Power supply pins. Connect all these pins to the system power supply. Ground pins. Connect all these pins to the system power supply (0V). External capacitance pin for internal power-down power supply. Connect this pin to VSS via a 0.1-F capacitor (placed close to the pins). External capacitance pin for internal power-down power supply for an on-chip PLL oscillator. Connect this pin to PLLVSS via a 0.1-F capacitor (placed close to the pins). On-chip PLL oscillator ground pin. External capacitance pin for an on-chip PLL oscillator. For connection to a crystal resonator. For examples of crystal resonator connection and external clock input, see section 17, Clock Pulse Generator. For connection to a crystal resonator. (An external clock can be supplied from the EXTAL pin.) For examples of crystal resonator connection and external clock input, see section 17, Clock Pulse Generator. Supplies the system clock to external devices. Set the operating mode. Inputs at these pins should not be changed during operation. Reset input pin. When this pin is low, the chip is reset. When this pin is low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Pin for use by flash memory. This pin is only used in the flash memory version.
VSS
Input
VCL
Output
Clock
PLLVCL
Output
PLLVSS PLLCAP XTAL
46 42 47
Input Output Input
EXTAL
49
Input
Operating mode control System control MD2 MD1 MD0 RES STBY FWE
15 40 39 38 41 45 51
Output Input
Input Input Input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 4 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type Interrupts
Symbol NMI IRQ5 IRQ4 IRQ3 IRQ2 IRQ1 IRQ0
Pin NO. 43 21 18 11 8 4 2 79 1 3 5 75 77 79 1 2 3 4 5 24 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 5 4 3 2 1 79 77 75
I/O Input Input
Function Nonmaskable interrupt pin. If this pin is not used, it should be fixed high. These pins request a maskable interrupt.
16-bit timerpulse unit (TPU)
TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 TIOCA5 TIOCB5
Input
These pins input an external clock.
Input/ Output
TGRA_0 to TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins.
Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output
TGRA_1 to TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_2 to TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_3 to TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins.
Input/ Output Input/ Output Output
TGRA_4 to TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_5 to TGRB_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. Pulse output pins.
Programmable pulse generator (PPG)
PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 5 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type Serial communication interface (SCI)/ smart card interface
Symbol TxD2 TxD1 TxD0 RxD2 RxD1 RxD0 SCK2 SCK1 SCK0
Pin NO. 35 19 16 36 20 17 37 21 18 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 11 61
I/O Output
Function Data output pins.
Input
Data input pins.
Input/ Output Input
Clock input/output pins.
A/D converter
AN11 AN10 AN9 AN8 AN7 AN6 AN5 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 ADTRG AVCC
Analog input pins.
Input Input
Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. Power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the A/D converter is not used, connect this pin to the system power supply (+5V). The ground pin for the A/D converter. Connect this pin to the system power supply (0V). Eight input/output pins.
AVSS I/O ports P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10
74 5 4 3 2 1 79 77 75
Input Input/ Output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 6 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type I/O ports
Symbol P47 P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40 P93 P92 P91 P90 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
Pin NO. 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 62 63 64 65 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 26 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
I/O Input
Function Eight input pins.
Input
Four input pins.
Input/ Output
Four input/output pins.
Input/ Output
Eight input/output pins.
Input/ Output
Eight input/output pins.
Input/ Output
Eight input/output pins.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 7 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol PF7 PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0
Pin NO. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
I/O Input/ Output
Function Eight input/output pins.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 8 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
The H8S/2600 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2600 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. This section describes the H8S/2600 CPU. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.
2.1
Features
* Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs object programs * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers * Sixty-nine basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions Multiply-and-accumulate instruction * Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] * 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 9 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
* High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 1 state 8 x 8-bit register-register multiply: 3 states 16 / 8-bit register-register divide: 12 states 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 4 states 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: 20 states * Two CPU operating modes Normal mode* Advanced mode * Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction CPU clock speed selection Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI. 2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below. * Register configuration The MAC register is supported by the H8S/2600 CPU only. * Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported by the H8S/2600 CPU only. * The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions;
Execution States Instruction MULXU Mnemonic MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd MULXS MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd H8S/2600 3 4 4 5 H8S/2000 12 20 13 21
In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, and powerdown modes, etc., depending on the model.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 10 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.1.2
Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements: * More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit expanded registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been added. * Expanded address space Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. * Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU
In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements: * Additional control register One 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers have been added. * Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. * Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 11 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.2
CPU Operating Modes
The H8S/2600 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address space. The mode is selected by the mode pins. 2.2.1 Normal Mode
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU. * Address Space A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed. * Extended Registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@-Rn) or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected. * Instruction Set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. * Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The exception vector table differs depending on the microcontroller. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16-bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. * Stack Structure When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.2. EXR is not pushed onto the stack in interrupt control mode 0. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 12 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B
Reset exception vector (Reserved for system use)
(Reserved for system use)
Exception vector table
Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2
Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
SP
PC (16 bits)
SP *2 (SP )
EXR*1 Reserved*1 *3 CCR CCR*3 PC (16 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack. 2. SP when EXR is not used. 3. lgnored when returning.
(b) Exception Handling
Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 13 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.2.2
Advanced Mode
* Address Space Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space is provided. * Extended Registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. * Instruction Set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. * Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses In advanced mode, the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.3). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling.
H'00000000 Reserved Exception vector 1 H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved Exception vector 2 H'00000007 H'00000008 Reserved Exception vector table Exception vector 3 H'0000000B H'0000000C Reserved Exception vector 4 H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 5
Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 14 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits is a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table. * Stack Structure In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.4. When EXR is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
SP SP Reserved PC (24 bits) *2 ) (SP
EXR*1 Reserved*1 *3 CCR PC (24 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack. 2. SP when EXR is not used. 3. Ignored when returning.
(b) Exception Handling
Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 15 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.3
Address Space
Figure 2.5 shows a memory map for the H8S/2600 CPU. The H8S/2600 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.
H'0000 64 kbytes H'FFFF 16 Mbytes Program area H'00000000
H'00FFFFFF
Data area
Cannot be used in this LSI
H'FFFFFFFF (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode
Figure 2.5 Memory Map
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 16 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.4
Register Configuration
The H8S/2600 CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.6. There are two types of registers; general registers and control registers. The control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), an 8-bit extended control register (EXR), an 8-bit condition code register (CCR), and a 64-bit multiply-accumulate register (MAC).
General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)
15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 (SP) E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0
Control Registers (CR)
23 PC 0
EXR T
76543210 - - - - I2 I1 I0
76543210
CCR I UI H U N Z V C 63 MAC 31 Sign extension MACL 0 41 MACH 32
[Legend]
SP: PC: EXR: T: I2 to I0: CCR: I: UI: Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit H: U: N: Z: V: C: MAC: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Multiply-accumulate register
Figure 2.6 CPU Registers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 17 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.4.1
General Registers
The H8S/2600 CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally identical and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.7 illustrates the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8bit registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.8 shows the stack.
* Address registers * 32-bit registers * 16-bit registers * 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) RH registers (R0H to R7H)
Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 18 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Free area SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.8 Stack 2.4.2 Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) 2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR)
EXR is an 8-bit register that manipulates the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. When these instructions, except for the STC instruction, are executed, all interrupts including NMI will be masked for three states after execution is completed.
Bit 7 Bit Name T Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Trace Bit When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated each time an instruction is executed. When this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are executed in sequence. 6 to 3 2 1 0 -- I2 I1 I0 All 1 1 1 1 -- R/W R/W R/W Reserved They are always read as 1. These bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to 7). For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 19 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.4.4
Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions.
Bit 7 Bit Name I Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Interrupt Mask Bit Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. 6 UI undefined R/W User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit in this LSI. 5 H undefined R/W Half-Carry Flag When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. 4 U undefined R/W User Bit Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. 3 N undefined R/W Negative Flag Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a sign bit. 2 Z undefined R/W Zero Flag Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 20 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Bit 1
Bit Name V
Initial Value undefined
R/W R/W
Description Overflow Flag Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times.
0
C
undefined
R/W
Carry Flag Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: * * * Add instructions, to indicate a carry Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions.
2.4.5
Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)
This 64-bit register stores the results of multiply-and-accumulate operations. It consists of two 32bit registers denoted MACH and MACL. The lower 10 bits of MACH are valid; the upper bits are a sign extension. 2.4.6 Initial Values of CPU Registers
Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 21 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5
Data Formats
The H8S/2600 CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.9 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
1-bit data
Register Number
RnH
Data Format
7 0 Don't care 76 54 32 10
7 1-bit data RnL Don't care
0
76 54 32 10
7 4-bit BCD data RnH Upper
43 Lower
0 Don't care
7 4-bit BCD data RnL Don't care Upper
43 Lower
0
7 Byte data RnH MSB
0 Don't care LSB 7 0 LSB
Byte data
RnL
Don't care MSB
Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 22 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Data Type Word data
Register Number Rn
Data Format
15
0
MSB
LSB
Word data
15
En
0
MSB
LSB
Longword data
31
ERn
16 15 0
MSB
En
Rn
LSB
[Legend] ERn: General register ER En: General register E Rn: General register R RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 23 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in memory. The H8S/2600 CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, however word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, an address error does not occur, however the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so access begins the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. When ER7 is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word or longword.
Data Type Address
7 1-bit data Address L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Data Format
0 0
Byte data
Address L
MSB
LSB
Word data
Address 2M Address 2M+1
MSB LSB
Longword data
Address 2N Address 2N+1 Address 2N+2 Address 2N+3
MSB
LSB
Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 24 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Instruction Set
The H8S/2600 CPU has 69 instructions. The instructions are classified by function in table 2.1. Table 2.1
Function Data transfer
Instruction Classification
Instructions MOV POP*1, PUSH*1 LDM, STM MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3 Size B/W/L W/L L B B/W/L B B/W/L L B/W W/L B -- B/W/L B/W/L B -- 4 8 14 5 9 1 Total: 69 23 Types 5
Arithmetic operations
ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS EXTU, EXTS TAS*4 MAC, LDMAC, STMAC, CLRMAC
Logic operations Shift Bit manipulation Branch System control
AND, OR, XOR, NOT SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP -- --
Block data transfer EEPMOV [Legend]
Notes: 1.
2. 3. 4.
B: Byte W: Word L: Longword POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-SP. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. Cannot be used in this LSI. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 25 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.6.1
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in tables 2.3 to 2.10 is defined below. Table 2.2
Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERn MAC (EAd) (EAs) EXR CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / :8/:16/:24/:32 Note: *
Operation Notation
Description General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register) Multiply-accumulate register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Extended control register Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND Logical OR Logical XOR Move NOT (logical complement) 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 26 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3
Instruction MOV
Data Transfer Instructions
Size* B/W/L Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. Cannot be used in this LSI. Cannot be used in this LSI. @SP+ Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. Rn @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. @SP+ Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack. Rn (register list) @-SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack.
MOVFPE MOVTPE POP
B B W/L
PUSH
W/L
LDM STM Note: *
L L
Refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 27 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.4
Instruction ADD SUB
Arithmetic Operations Instructions
Size* B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register (immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction). Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #IMM C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd, Rd 4 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. Rd decimal adjust Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. Rd x Rs Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Rd x Rs Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Rd / Rs Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
ADDX SUBX INC DEC ADDS SUBS DAA DAS MULXU
B
B/W/L
L B
B/W
MULXS
B/W
DIVXU
B/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 28 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Instruction DIVXS
Size*1 B/W
Function Rd / Rs Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result. 0 - Rd Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. Rd (zero extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. Rd (sign extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. @ERd - 0, 1 ( of @ERd) Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1. (EAs) x (EAd) + MAC MAC Performs signed multiplication on memory contents and adds the result to the multiply-accumulate register. The following operations can be performed: 16 bits x 16 bits + 32 bits 32 bits, saturating 16 bits x 16 bits + 42 bits 42 bits, non-saturating 0 MAC Clears the multiply-accumulate register to zero. Rs MAC, MAC Rd Transfers data between a general register and a multiply-accumulate register.
CMP
B/W/L
NEG
B/W/L
EXTU
W/L
EXTS
W/L
2 TAS*
B --
MAC
CLRMAC LDMAC STMAC
-- L
Notes: 1. Refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 29 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.5
Instruction AND
Logic Operations Instructions
Size* B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rd Takes the one's complement of general register contents.
OR
B/W/L
XOR
B/W/L
NOT Note: *
B/W/L
Refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword
Table 2.6
Instruction SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR Note: *
Shift Instructions
Size* B/W/L Function Rd (shift) Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit shifts are possible. Rd (shift) Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit shifts are possible. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit rotations are possible. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry flag. 1-bit or 2-bit rotations are possible.
B/W/L
B/W/L
B/W/L
Refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 30 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.7
Instruction BSET
Bit Manipulation Instructions
Size* B Function 1 ( of ) Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. 0 ( of ) Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. ( of ) ( of ) Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. ( of ) Z Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. C ( of ) C ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. C ( of ) C ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. C ( of ) C ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. C ( of ) C ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BCLR
B
BNOT
B
BTST
B
BAND
B
BIAND
B
BOR
B
BIOR
B
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 31 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Instruction BXOR
Size* B
Function C ( of ) C XORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. C ( of ) C XORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. ( of ) C Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. ( of ) C Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. C ( of ) Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. C ( of ) Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BIXOR
B
BLD
B
BILD
B
BST
B
BIST
B
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size. B: Byte
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 32 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.8
Instruction Bcc
Branch Instructions
Size -- Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS BCC (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry clear (high or same) Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z (N V) = 0 Z (N V) = 1
JMP BSR JSR RTS
-- -- -- --
Branches unconditionally to a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Returns from a subroutine.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 33 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.9
Instruction TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC
System Control Instructions
Size* -- -- -- B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling. Returns from an exception-handling routine. Causes a transition to a power-down state. (EAs) CCR, (EAs) EXR Moves the source operand contents or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. CCR (EAd), EXR (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically XORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter.
STC
B/W
ANDC ORC XORC NOP Note: *
B B B --
Refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 34 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction EEPMOV.B Size -- Function if R4L 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+ R4L-1 R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+ R4-1 R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set in ER6. Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed.
EEPMOV.W
--
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 35 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.6.2
Basic Instruction Formats
This LSI instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). Figure 2.11 shows examples of instruction formats. * Operation Field Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. * Register Field Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. * Effective Address Extension 8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. * Condition Field Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
(1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc.
Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 36 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
The H8S/2600 CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except programcounter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or the absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.11 Addressing Modes
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) @@aa:8
2.7.1
Register Direct--Rn
The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2.7.2 Register Indirect--@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of the operand on memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 37 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.3
Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. 2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn
Register Indirect with Post-Increment--@ERn+: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For the word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even. Register Indirect with Pre-Decrement--@-ERn: The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result is the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For the word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even. 2.7.5 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 38 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute Address Data address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 32 bits (@aa:32) Program instruction address Note: * 24 bits (@aa:24) Normal Mode* H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
2.7.6
Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. 2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 39 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.8
Memory Indirect--@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode, the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode, the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be 0 (H'00). Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Specified by @aa:8
Branch address
Specified by @aa:8
Reserved Branch address
(a) Normal Mode*
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
(b) Advanced Mode
Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 40 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.9
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI. Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation
No 1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Register direct (Rn)
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Operand is general register contents.
op 2
rm
rn 31
General register contents
Register indirect (@ERn)
0
31
24 23
0
Don't care
op 3
r
Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
31
General register contents
0 31 24 23 0
op
r
disp 31
Sign extension
Don't care 0 disp
4
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement * Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
31
General register contents
0
31
24 23
0
Don't care
op
r 31
1, 2, or 4
* Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn
0
General register contents
31
24 23
0
Don't care op r
Operand Size Byte Word Longword 1, 2, or 4
Offset 1 2 4
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 41 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
No 5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Absolute address
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
@aa:8 op abs
31
24 23 H'FFFF
87
0
Don't care
@aa:16 op abs
31
24 23
16 15
0
Don't care Sign extension
@aa:24 op abs
31
24 23
0
Don't care
@aa:32 op abs 31 24 23 0
Don't care
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op IMM
Operand is immediate data.
7
Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
23
PC contents
0
op
disp
23
Sign extension
0 disp 31 24 23 0
Don't care
8
Memory indirect @@aa:8 * Normal mode*
31 op abs H'000000 15
87 abs
0
0
Memory contents
31
24 23
16 15 H'00
0
Don't care
* Advanced mode
31 op abs 31
Memory contents
87 H'000000 abs
0 31 24 23 Don't care 0
0
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 42 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.8
Processing States
The H8S/2600 CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the processing states. Figure 2.13 indicates the state transitions. * Reset State In this state, the CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are initialized and not operating. When the RES input goes low, all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. For details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. * Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to an exception source, such as a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. * Program Execution State In this state, the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. * Bus-Released State In a product which has a bus master other than the CPU, such as a data transfer controller (DTC), the bus-released state occurs when the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts operations. * Program stop state This is a power-down state in which the CPU stops operating. The program stop state occurs when a SLEEP instruction is executed or the CPU enters hardware standby mode. For further details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 43 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 2 CPU
Reset state*
R
ES
=H
igh
, igh = H ow BY = L ST ES R
Exception handling state
In reqterru ue pt st
Bus-released state
Request for exception handling
End of exception handling
s Bu est u eq r
Bus request
End of bus request
s bu of t nd ques Ee r
SLEEP instruction Program halt state
Program execution state
Notes: From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. * From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows.
Figure 2.13 State Transitions
2.9
2.9.1
Usage Notes
Usage Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions are used to read data in bytes, then, after bit manipulation, they write data in bytes again. Therefore, special care is necessary to use these instructions for the registers and the ports that include write-only bit. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear the flags in the internal I/O registers to 0. In this time, if it is obvious that the flag has been set to 1 in the interrupt processing routine or other processing, there is no need to read the flag beforehand.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 44 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1 Operating Mode Selection
This LSI supports only operating mode 7, that is, the advanced single-chip mode. The operating mode is determined by the setting of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0). Only mode 7 can be used in this LSI. Therefore, all mode pins must be fixed high, as shown in table 3.1. Do not change the mode pin settings during operation. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection
External Data Bus On-Chip Initial ROM Width Enabled -- Max Width --
MCU CPU Operating Operating Mode MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode Description 7 1 1 1 Advanced Single-chip mode mode
3.2
Register Descriptions
The following registers are related to the operating mode. * Mode control register (MDCR) * System control register (SYSCR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 45 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2.1
Bit 7 6 to 3
Mode Control Register(MDCR)
Bit Name -- -- Intial Value 1 All 0 R/W R/W -- Descriptions Reserved Only 1 should be written to this bit. Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
2 1 0
MDS2 MDS1 MDS0
-- -- --
R R R
These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD2 to MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0. MDS2 to MDS0 are read-only bits and they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD2 to MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. These latches are canceled by a reset. These latches are canceled by a reset.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 46 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2.2
System Control Register(SYSCR)
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects saturating or non-saturating calculation for the MAC instruction, selects the interrupt control mode and the detected edge for NMI, and enables or disables on-chip RAM.
Bit 7 Bit Name MACS Intial Value 0 R/W -- Descriptions MAC Saturation Selects either saturating or non-saturating calculation for the MAC instruction. 0: Non-saturating calculation for the MAC instruction 1: Saturating calculation for the MAC instruction 6 5 4 -- INTM1 INTM0 0 0 0 -- R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. These bits select the control mode of the interrupt controller. For details of the interrupt control modes, see section 5.6, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation. 00: Interrupt control mode 0 01: Setting prohibited 10: Interrupt control mode 2 11: Setting prohibited 3 NMIEG 0 R/W NMI Edge Select Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input. 0: An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI input 1: An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI input 2, 1 -- All 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM Enable Enables or disables on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset status is released. 0: On-chip RAM is disabled 1: On-chip RAM is enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 47 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled, however external addresses cannot be accessed. All I/O ports are available for use as input-output ports. 3.3.1 Pin Functions
Table 3.2 shows their functions in mode 7. Table 3.2
Port Port 1 P10 P11 to P13 Port A Port B Port C Port D Port F PF7 PF6 to PF4 PF3 PF2 to PF0 [Legend] P: I/O port C: Control signals, clock I/O *: After reset PA3 to PA0 P P P P P*/C P
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Mode 7 P
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 48 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.4
Address Map
Figure 3.1 shows the address map in each operating mode.
H8S/2602 ROM: 128 kbytes, RAM: 4 kbytes Mode 7 Advanced single-chip mode H'000000 H'000000 H8S/2601 ROM: 64 kbytes, RAM: 4 kbytes Mode 7 Advanced single-chip mode
On-chip ROM (mask ROM version)
H'00FFFF On-chip ROM (F-ZTAT version/ mask ROM* version)
H'01FFFF
H'01FFFF
H'FFE000 On-chip RAM H'FFEFBF
H'FFE000 On-chip RAM H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800 On-chip I/O registers H'FFFF3F
H'FFF800 On-chip I/O registers H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60 On-chip I/O registers H'FFFFBF H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF60 H'FFFFBF H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM H'FFFFFF On-chip I/O registers
Figure 3.1 Address Map
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 49 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 50 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Exception sources, the stack structure, and operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode. For details on the interrupt control mode, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 4.1
Priority High
Exception Types and Priority
Exception Type Reset Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. The CPU enters the reset state when the RES pin is low. Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (T) bit in the EXR is set to 1. Starts when a direction transition occurs as the result of SLEEP instruction execution. Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued*2. Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA).
Trace*1 Direct transition Interrupt Low Trap instruction*3
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an RTE instruction. 2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program execution state.
4.2
Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table
Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. Since the usable modes differ depending on the product, for details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 51 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.2
Exception Handling Vector Table
Vector Number 0 1 2 3 4 Vector Address*1 Normal Mode*2 H'0000 to H'0001 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0005 H'0006 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'0019 H'000A to H'000B H'000C to H'000D H'000E to H'000F H'0010 to H'0011 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0016 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'0019 H'001A to H'001B H'001C to H'001D H'001E to H'001F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'0029 H'002A to H'002B H'002C to H'002D H'002E to H'002F H'0030 to H'0031 H'00FE to H'00FF Advanced Mode H'0000 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'000B H'000C to H'000F H'0010 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'001B H'001C to H'001F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'002B H'002C to H'002F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'003B H'003C to H'003F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0058 to H'005B H'005C to H'005F H'0060 to H'0063 H'01FC to H'01FF
Exception Source Power-on reset Manual reset*2 Reserved for system use
Trace Interrupt (direct transitions)*2 Interrupt (NMI) Trap instruction (#0) (#1) (#2) (#3) Reserved for system use
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
External interrupt
IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Reserved for system use Internal interrupt*
3
24 127
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Not available in this LSI. 3. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.5, Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 52 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.3
Reset
A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. To ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip supporting modules. The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 12, Watchdog Timer. The interrupt control mode is 0 immediately after reset. 4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset exception handling as follows: 1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bit is set to 1 in EXR and CCR. 2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figures 4.1 and 4.2 show examples of the reset sequence.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 53 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Vector fetch
Prefetch of first Internal processing program instruction
RES
Internal address bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
Internal read signal
Internal write signal Internal data bus
High
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1)(3) (2)(4) (5) (6)
Reset exception handling vector address(when reset, (1)=H'000000, (3)=H'000002) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) Start address ((5)=(2)(4)) First program instruction
Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Enabled)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 54 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Vector fetch
Internal processing
Prefetch of first program instruction
*
*
*
RES
Address bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
RD
HWR, LWR
High
D15 to D0
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1)(3) (2)(4) (5) (6)
Reset exception handling vector address(when reset, (1)=H'000000, (3)=H'000002) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) Start address ((5)=(2)(4)) First program instruction
Note: * Three program wait states are inserted.
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Disabled: Cannot be Used in this LSI)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 55 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.3.2
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP). 4.3.3 State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release
After reset release, MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC are initialized to H'3F, H'FF, and H'FF, respectively, and all modules except the DTC enter module stop mode. Consequently, on-chip supporting module registers cannot be read or written to. Register reading and writing is enabled when the module stop mode is exited.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 56 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.4
Traces
Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details of interrupt control modes, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on completion of each instruction. Trace mode is not affected by interrupt masking. Table 4.3 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling. Trace mode is canceled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0. The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace exception handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes. Trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the RTE instruction. Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine. Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling
CCR I UI I2 to I0 EXR T
Interrupt Control Mode 0 2 [Legend] 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 --: Retains value prior to execution
Trace exception handling cannot be used. 1 -- -- 0
4.5
Interrupts
Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to eight priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. The source to start interrupt exception handling and the vector address differ depending on the product. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Interrupt exception handling is conducted as follows: 1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are saved to the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded from the vector table to the PC, and program execution begins from that address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 57 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.6
Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. Trap instruction exception handling is conducted as follows: 1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are saved to the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared. 3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 4.4 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
CCR I 1 1 UI -- -- I2 to I0 -- -- EXR T -- 0
Interrupt Control Mode 0 2 [Legend] 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 --: Retains value prior to execution
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 58 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.7
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figures 4.3 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling.
(a) Normal Modes*2
SP
EXR Reserved*1
SP
CCR CCR*1 PC (16 bits)
CCR CCR*1 PC (16 bits)
Interrupt control mode 0
Interrupt control mode 2
(b) Advanced Modes
SP
EXR Reserved*1
SP
CCR PC (24 bits)
CCR PC (24 bits)
Interrupt control mode 0 Notes: 1. Ignored on return. 2. Normal modes are not available in this LSI.
Interrupt control mode 2
Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 59 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.8
Usage Note
When accessing word data or longword data, this LSI assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W PUSH.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W POP.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.4 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd.
Address
CCR SP PC
SP
R1L
H'FFFEFA H'FFFEFB
PC
H'FFFEFC H'FFFEFD H'FFFEFE
SP
H'FFFEFF
SP set to H'FFFEFF
TRAP instruction executed Data saved above SP
MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 executed Contents of CCR lost
[Legend] CCR: Condition code register PC: Program counter R1L: General register R1L SP: Stack pointer Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode.
Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value is Odd
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 60 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1 Features
* Two interrupt control modes Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the system control register (SYSCR). * Priorities settable with IPR An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI. NMI is assigned the highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times. * Independent vector addresses All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. * Seven external interrupts NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling edge can be selected for NMI. Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for IRQ0 to IRQ5. * DTC control The DTC can be activated by an interrupt request.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 61 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1.
INTM1, INTM0 SYSCR NMIEG NMI input IRQ input NMI input unit IRQ input unit ISR ISCR IER Priority determination I Interrupt request Vector number
CPU
Internal interrupt request SWDTEND to TEI2
CCR I2 to I0 EXR
IPR Interrupt controller [Legend] ISCR: IER: ISR: IPR: SYSCR:
IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt priority register System control register
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 62 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 5.1
Name NMI IRQ5 IRQ4 IRQ3 IRQ2 IRQ1 IRQ0
Pin Configuration
I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Function Nonmaskable external interrupt Rising or falling edge can be selected Maskable external interrupts Rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be selected
5.3
Register Descriptions
The interrupt controller has the following registers. For details on system control register (SYSCR), refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * System control register (SYSCR) IRQ sense control register H (ISCRH) IRQ sense control register L (ISCRL) IRQ enable register (IER) IRQ status register (ISR) Interrupt priority register A (IPRA) Interrupt priority register B (IPRB) Interrupt priority register C (IPRC) Interrupt priority register D (IPRD) Interrupt priority register E (IPRE) Interrupt priority register F (IPRF) Interrupt priority register G (IPRG) Interrupt priority register H (IPRH) Interrupt priority register J (IPRJ) Interrupt priority register K (IPRK) Interrupt priority register M (IPRM)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 63 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.1
Interrupt Priority Registers A to H, J, K, M (IPRA to IPRH, IPRJ, IPRK, IPRM)
The IPR registers are eleven 8-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for interrupts other than NMI. The correspondence between interrupt sources and IPR settings is shown in table 5.2. Setting a value in the range from H'0 to H'7 in the 3-bit groups of bits 0 to 2 and 4 to 6 sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt.
Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name -- IPR6 IPR5 IPR4 Initial Value 0 1 1 1 R/W -- R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. These bits set the priority of the corresponding interrupt source. 000: Priority level 0 (Lowest) 001: Priority level 1 010: Priority level 2 011: Priority level 3 100: Priority level 4 101: Priority level 5 110: Priority level 6 111: Priority level 7 (Highest) 3 2 1 0 -- IPR2 IPR1 IPR0 0 1 1 1 -- R/W R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0. These bits set the priority of the corresponding interrupt source. 000: Priority level 0 (Lowest) 001: Priority level 1 010: Priority level 2 011: Priority level 3 100: Priority level 4 101: Priority level 5 110: Priority level 6 111: Priority level 7 (Highest)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 64 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.2
IRQ Enable Register (IER)
IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ0 to IRQ5.
Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. IRQ5E IRQ5 Enable The IRQ5 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 4 IRQ4E 0 R/W IRQ4 Enable The IRQ4 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 3 IRQ3E 0 R/W IRQ3 Enable The IRQ3 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W IRQ2 Enable The IRQ2 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W IRQ1 Enable The IRQ1 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W IRQ0 Enable The IRQ0 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
-
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 65 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.3
IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)
The ISCR registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers that select the source that generates an interrupt request at pins IRQ0 to IRQ5.
Bit 15 to 12 11 10 Bit Name Initial Value R/W All 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ5 Sense Control B IRQ5 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ5 input level low 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ5 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ5 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ5 input 9 8 IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ4 Sense Control B IRQ4 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ4 input level low 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ4 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ4 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ4 input 7 6 IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ3 Sense Control B IRQ3 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ3 input level low 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ3 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ3 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ3 input
-
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 66 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit 5 4
Bit Name IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA
Initial Value R/W 0 0 R/W R/W
Description IRQ2 Sense Control B IRQ2 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ2 input level low 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ2 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ2 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ2 input
3 2
IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA
0 0
R/W R/W
IRQ1 Sense Control B IRQ1 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ1 input level low 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ1 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ1 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ1 input
1 0
IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA
0 0
R/W R/W
IRQ0 Sense Control B IRQ0 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ0 input level low 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ0 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ0 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ0 input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 67 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.4
IRQ Status Register (ISR)
ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt requests.
Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F [Setting condition] * When the interrupt source selected by the ISCR registers occurs Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1, then writing 0 to IRQnF flag When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set and IRQn input is high When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or both-edge detection is set When the DTC is activated by an IRQn interrupt, and the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC is cleared to 0 (n = 5 to 0)
-
[Clearing conditions] * *
*
*
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 68 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4
5.4.1
Interrupt
External Interrupts
There are seven external interrupts: NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ5. These interrupts can be used to restore this LSI from software standby mode. NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin. IRQ0 to IRQ5 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ0 to IRQ5. Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 have the following features: * Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ0 to IRQ5. * Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ0 to IRQ5 can be selected with IER. * The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR. * The status of interrupt requests IRQ0 to IRQ5 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. The detection of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding DDR to 0; and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. A block diagram of interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 is shown in figure 5.2.
IRQnE IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB IRQnF Edge/level detection circuit IRQn input Clear signal Note: n = 5 to 0 S R Q IRQn interrupt request
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 69 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.2
Internal Interrupts
The sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules have the following features: * For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If both of these are set to 1 for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. * The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR. * The DTC can be activated by a TPU, SCI, or other interrupt request. * When the DTC is activated by an interrupt request, it is not affected by the interrupt control mode or CPU interrupt mask bit.
5.5
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table
Table 5.2 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among modules can be set by means of the IPR. Modules set at the same priority will conform to their default priorities. Priorities within a module are fixed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 70 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Vector Address*
Interrupt Source External pin
Origin of Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5
Vector Number 7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 32 33 34 35 36 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Advanced Mode H'001C H'0040 H'0044 H'0048 H'004C H'0050 H'0054 H'0058 H'005C H'0060 H'0064 H'006C H'0070 H'0080 H'0084 H'0088 H'008C H'0090 H'00A0 H'00A4 H'00A8 H'00AC H'00B0 H'00B4 H'00B8 H'00BC H'00C0 H'00C4 H'00C8
IPR IPRA6 to IPRA4 IPRA2 to IPRA0 IPRB6 to IPRB4 IPRB2 to IPRB0
Priority High
--
Reserved for system use Reserved for system use
DTC Watchdog timer 0 PC break A/D TPU channel 0
SWDTEND WOVI0 PC break ADI TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0 TCIV_0
IPRC2 to IPRC0 IPRD6 to IPRD4 IPRE6 to IPRE4 IPRE2 to IPRE0 IPRF6 to IPRF4
TPU channel 1
TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TCIV_1 TCIU_1
IPRF2 to IPRF0
TPU channel 2
TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TCIV_2 TCIU_2
IPRG6 to IPRG4
TPU channel 3
TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3
IPRG2 to IPRG0 Low
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 71 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Vector Address* Interrupt Source TPU channel 3 TPU channel 4 Origin of Interrupt Source TGID_3 TCIV_3 TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TCIV_4 TCIU_4 TPU channel 5 TGIA_5 TGIB_5 TCIV_5 TCIU_5 SCI channel 0 ERI_0 RXI_0 TXI_0 TEI_0 SCI channel 1 ERI_1 RXI_1 TXI_1 TEI_1 SCI channel 2 ERI_2 RXI_2 TXI_2 TEI_2 -- Note: * Reserved for system use Vector Number 51 52 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 111 Advanced Mode H'00CC H'00D0 H'00E0 H'00E4 H'00E8 H'00EC H'00F0 H'00F4 H'00F8 H'00FC H'0140 H'0144 H'0148 H'014C H'0150 H'0154 H'0158 H'015C H'0160 H'0164 H'0168 H'016C H'01BC Low IPRK2 to IPRK0 IPRK6 to IPRK4 IPRJ2 to IPRJ0 IPRH2 to IPRH0 IPRH6 to IPRH4 IPR Priority High
Lower 16 bits of the start address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 72 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
The interrupt controller has two modes: interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2. Interrupt operations differ depending on the interrupt control mode. The interrupt control mode is selected by SYSCR. Table 5.3 shows the differences between interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2. Table 5.3 Interrupt Control Modes
Priority Setting Registers Default Interrupt Mask Bits I Description The priorities of interrupt sources are fixed at the default settings. Interrupt sources, except for NMI, are masked by the I bit. 8 priority levels other than NMI can be set with IPR. 8-level interrupt mask control is performed by bits I2 to I0.
Interrupt Control Mode 0
2
IPR
I2 to I0
5.6.1
Interrupt Control Mode 0
In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt requests other than for NMI are masked by the I bit of the CCR in the CPU. Figure 5.3 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. If the I bit is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If the I bit is cleared, an interrupt request is accepted. 3. Interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 73 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the vector table.
Program execution status
Interrupt generated? Yes Yes
No
NMI No I=0 Yes No Hold pending
No IRQ0 Yes No IRQ1 Yes
TEI_2 Yes
Save PC and CCR I1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.3 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 74 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.2
Interrupt Control Mode 2
In interrupt control mode 2, mask control is applied to eight levels for interrupt requests other than NMI by comparing the EXR interrupt mask level (I2 to I0 bits) in the CPU and the IPR setting. Figure 5.4 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.2 is selected. 3. Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level is accepted. 4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of the accepted interrupt. If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7. 7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the vector table.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 75 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution status
Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI No No
No
Level 7 interrupt? Yes Mask level 6 or below? Yes
Level 6 interrupt? No Yes
No
Level 1 interrupt? Mask level 5 or below? Yes Mask level 0? Yes No Yes
No
No
Save PC, CCR, and EXR
Hold pending
Clear T bit to 0
Update mask level
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Control Mode 2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 76 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.3
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 5.5 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 77 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
REJ09B0425-0100
Interrupt acceptance Internal operation stack Vector fetch Internal operation Interrupt service routine instruction prefetch (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) (6) (8) (9) (11) (10) (12) (13) (14) Saved PC and saved CCR Vector address Interrupt handling routine start address (Vector address contents) Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12)) First instruction of interrupt handling routine
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt level determination Instruction Wait for end of instruction prefetch
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 78 of 456
Interrupt request signal
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal write signal
Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling
Internal data bus
(1)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address) (2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed) (5) SP-2 (7) SP-4
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.4
Interrupt Response Times
Table 5.4 shows interrupt response times - the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status symbols used in table 5.4 are explained in table 5.5. This LSI is capable of fast word transfer to on-chip memory, has the program area in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling high-speed processing. Table 5.4 Interrupt Response Times
Normal Mode*5 Interrupt control mode 0 3 Interrupt control mode 2 3 Advanced Mode Interrupt control mode 0 3 Interrupt control mode 2 3
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Execution Status Interrupt priority determination*1 Number of wait states until executing instruction ends*2 PC, CCR, EXR stack save Vector fetch Instruction fetch*3 Internal processing*
4
1 to 19 + 2 * 1 to 19 + 2 * SI SI 2 * SK SI 2 * SI 2 11 to 31 3 * SK SI 2 * SI 2 12 to 32
1 to 19 + 2 * 1 to 19 + 2 * SI SI 2 * SK 2 * SI 2 * SI 2 12 to 32 3 * SK 2 * SI 2 * SI 2 13 to 33
Total (using on-chip memory) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Two states in case of internal interrupt. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 79 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.5
Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Status
Object of Access External Device* 8 Bit Bus 16 Bit Bus 2-State Access 2 3-State Access 3+m
Symbol Instruction fetch Branch address read Stack manipulation SI SJ SK
Internal Memory 1
2-State Access 4
3-State Access 6 + 2m
[Legend] M: Number of wait states in an external device access. Note: * Cannot be used in this LSI.
5.6.5
DTC Activation by Interrupt
The DTC can be activated by an interrupt. For details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 80 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.7
5.7.1
Usage Notes
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, and if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 5.6 shows an example in which the TGIEA bit in the TPU's TIER_0 register is cleared to 0. The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked.
TIER_0 write cycle by CPU TCIVexception handling
Internal address bus
TIER_0 address
Internal write signal
TCIEV
TCFV
TCIV interrupt signal
Figure 5.6 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 81 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.7.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
The instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions are executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.7.3 When Interrupts are Disabled
There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction. 5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used.
L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W BNE R4,R4 L1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 82 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
The PC break controller (PBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. Using these functions, it is easy to create a self-monitoring debugger, enabling programs to be debugged with the chip alone, without using an in-circuit emulator. A block diagram of the PC break controller is shown in figure 6.1.
6.1
Features
* Two break channels (A and B) * 24-bit break address Bit masking possible * Four types of break compare conditions Instruction fetch Data read Data write Data read/write * Bus master Either CPU or CPU/DTC can be selected * The timing of PC break exception handling after the occurrence of a break condition is as follows: Immediately before execution of the instruction fetched at the set address (instruction fetch) Immediately after execution of the instruction that accesses data at the set address (data access) * Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 83 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
BARA
BCRA
Output control
Mask control
Comparator
Match signal
Internal address
Control logic
Access status
PC break interrupt
Comparator
Match signal
Control logic
Output control
Mask control
BARB
BCRB
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 84 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.2
Register Descriptions
The PC break controller has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each process, refer to section 19, List of Registers. * * * * Break address register A (BARA) Break address register B (BARB) Break control register A (BCRA) Break control register B (BCRB) Break Address Register A (BARA)
6.2.1
BARA is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the channel A break address.
Bit 31 to 24 Bit Name -- Initial Value Undefined R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are read as an undefined value and cannot be modified. 23 to 0 BAA23 to BAA0 H'000000 R/W These bits set the channel A PC break address.
6.2.2
Break Address Register B (BARB)
BARB is the channel B break address register. The bit configuration is the same as for BARA.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 85 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.2.3
Break Control Register A (BCRA)
BCRA controls channel A PC breaks. BCRA also contains a condition match flag.
Bit 7 Bit Name CMFA Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Condition Match Flag A [Setting condition] * * 6 CDA 0 R/W When a condition set for channel A is satisfied When 0 is written to CMFA after reading CMFA = 1 [Clearing condition] CPU Cycle/DTC Cycle Select A Selects the channel A break condition bus master. 0: CPU 1: CPU or DTC 5 4 3 BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Break Address Mask Register A2 to A0 These bits specify which bits of the break address set in BARA are to be masked. 000: BAA23 to 0 (All bits are unmasked) 001: BAA23 to 1 (Lowest bit is masked) 010: BAA23 to 2 (Lower 2 bits are masked) 011: BAA23 to 3 (Lower 3 bits are masked) 100: BAA23 to 4 (Lower 4 bits are masked) 101: BAA23 to 8 (Lower 8 bits are masked) 110: BAA23 to 12 (Lower 12 bits are masked) 111: BAA23 to 16 (Lower 16 bits are masked) 2 1 CSELA1 CSELA0 0 0 R/W R/W Break Condition Select A Selects break condition of channel A. 00: Instruction fetch is used as break condition 01: Data read cycle is used as break condition 10: Data write cycle is used as break condition 11: Data read/write cycle is used as break condition 0 BIEA 0 R/W Break Interrupt Enable A When this bit is 1, the PC break interrupt request of channel A is enabled.
6.2.4
Break Control Register B (BCRB)
BCRB is the channel B break control register. The bit configuration is the same as for BCRA.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 86 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3
Operation
The operation flow from break condition setting to PC break interrupt exception handling is shown in section 6.3.1, PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch, and 6.3.2, PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access, taking the example of channel A. 6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch
1. Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, set the address of the first instruction byte as the break address. 2. Set the break conditions in BCR. Set bit 6 (CDA) to 0 to select the CPU because the bus master must be the CPU for a PC break caused by an instruction fetch. Set the address bits to be masked to bits 3 to 5 (BAMA2 to BAMA0). Set bits 1 and 2 (CSELA1 and CSELA0) to 00 to specify an instruction fetch as the break condition. Set bit 0 (BIEA) to 1 to enable break interrupts. 3. When the instruction at the set address is fetched, a PC break request is generated immediately before execution of the fetched instruction, and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set. 4. After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception handling is started. 6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access
1. Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by a data access, set the target ROM, RAM, I/O, or external address space address as the break address. Stack operations and branch address reads are included in data accesses. 2. Set the break conditions in BCRA. Select the bus master with bit 6 (CDA). Set the address bits to be masked to bits 3 to 5 (BAMA2 to BAMA0). Set bits 1 and 2 (CSELA1 and CSELA0) to 01, 10, or 11 to specify data access as the break condition. Set bit 0 (BIEA) to 1 to enable break interrupts. 3. After execution of the instruction that performs a data access on the set address, a PC break request is generated and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set. 4. After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception handling is started.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 87 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.3
Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling
* When a PC break interrupt is generated at the transfer address of an EEPMOV.B instruction PC break exception handling is executed after all data transfers have been completed and the EEPMOV.B instruction has ended. * When a PC break interrupt is generated at a DTC transfer address PC break exception handling is executed after the DTC has completed the specified number of data transfers, or after data for which the DISEL bit is set to 1 has been transferred. 6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes
The operation when a PC break interrupt is set for an instruction fetch at the address after a SLEEP instruction is shown below. * When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to sleep mode: After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is not made to sleep mode, and PC break interrupt handling is executed. After execution of PC break interrupt handling, the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (A)). * When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode: After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to the respective mode, and PC break interrupt handling is not executed. However, the CMFA or CMFB flag is set (figure 6.2 (B)).
SLEEP instruction execution SLEEP instruction execution
PC break exception handling
Transition to respective mode (B)
Execution of instruction after sleep instruction
(A)
Figure 6.2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 88 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.5
When Instruction Execution is Delayed by One State
While the break interrupt enable bit is set to 1, instruction execution is one state later than usual. * For 1-word branch instructions (Bcc d:8, BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, and RTS) in on-chip ROM or RAM. * When break interruption by instruction fetch is set, the set address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM space, and that address is used for data access, the instruction that executes the data access is one state later than in normal operation. * When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction has one of the addressing modes shown below, and that address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM, the instruction will be one state later than in normal operation. Addressing modes: @ERn, @(d:16,ERn), @(d:32,ERn), @-ERn/ERn+, @aa:8, @aa:24, @aa:32, @(d:8,PC), @(d:16,PC), @@aa:8 * When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction is NOP or SLEEP, or has #xx,Rn as its addressing mode, and that instruction is located in on-chip ROM or RAM, the instruction will be one state later than in normal operation.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 89 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.4
6.4.1
Usage Notes
Module Stop Mode Setting
PBC operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for PBC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes. 6.4.2 PC Break Interrupts
The PC break interrupt is shared by channels A and B. The channel from which the request was issued must be determined by the interrupt handler. 6.4.3 CMFA and CMFB
The CMFA and CMFB flags are not automatically cleared to 0, so 0 must be written to CMFA or CMFB after first reading the flag while it is set to 1. If the flag is left set to 1, another interrupt will be requested after interrupt handling ends. 6.4.4 PC Break Interrupt when DTC is Bus Master
A PC break interrupt generated when the DTC is the bus master is accepted after the bus has been transferred to the CPU by the bus controller. 6.4.5 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS Instruction
When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at an address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS instruction: Even if the instruction at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS instruction is fetched, it is not executed, and so a PC break interrupt is not generated by the instruction fetch at the next address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 90 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.4.6
I Bit Set by LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC Instruction
When the I bit is set by an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction, a PC break interrupt becomes valid two states after the end of the executing instruction. If a PC break interrupt is set for the instruction following one of these instructions, since interrupts, including NMI, are disabled for a 3-state period in the case of LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XOR, the next instruction is always executed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. 6.4.7 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following Bcc Instruction
When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at an address following a Bcc instruction: A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the next address is executed in accordance with the branch condition, and is not generated if the instruction at the next address is not executed. 6.4.8 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Branch Destination Address of Bcc Instruction
When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the branch destination address of a Bcc instruction: A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the branch destination is executed in accordance with the branch condition, and is not generated if the instruction at the branch destination is not executed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 91 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 92 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
Section 7 Bus Controller
The H8S/2600 CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol o. The bus controller controls a memory cycle and a bus cycle. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory and on-chip peripheral modules. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus masters: the CPU and data transfer controller (DTC).
7.1
Basic Timing
The period from one rising edge of o to the next is referred to as a "state". The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one, two, three, or four states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip peripheral modules, and the external address space. 7.1.1 On-Chip Memory Access Timing (ROM, RAM)
On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word transfer instruction. Figure 7.1 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Bus cycle T1 Internal address bus Address
Read access
Internal read signal Internal data bus Read data
Write access
Internal write signal Internal data bus Write data
Figure 7.1 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 93 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.2
On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Timing
The on-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. For details, refer to section 19, List of Registers. Figure 7.2 shows access timing for the on-chip supporting modules.
Bus cycle T1 Internal address bus Address T2
Read access
Internal read signal Internal data bus Read data
Write access
Internal write signal Internal data bus Write data
Figure 7.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle
7.2
Bus Arbitration
The Bus Controller has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations. There are two possible bus masters, the CPU and DTC, which perform read/write operations while they hold bus mastership. 7.2.1 Order of Priority of the Bus Masters
Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The bus arbiter detects the bus masters' bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal is canceled. The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows: (High) DTC > CPU (Low)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 94 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.2
Bus Transfer Timing
Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred immediately. The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. The timing for transfer of the bus is as follows: * The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between such operations. For details, refer to section 2.7, Bus States during Instruction Execution, in the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual. * If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately. The DTC can release the bus after a vector read, a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). It does not release the bus during a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 95 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 96 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
This LSI includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. The DTC's register information is stored in the on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register information.
8.1
Features
* Transfer is possible over any number of channels * Three transfer modes Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes are available * One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) * The direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space is possible * Activation by software is possible * Transfer can be set in byte or word units * A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC * Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 97 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Internal address bus On-chip RAM
Interrupt controller
DTC
DTCERA to DTCERG
Control logic
Interrupt request
CPU interrupt request [Legend] MRA, MRB: CRA, CRB: SAR: DAR: DTCERA to DTCERG: DTVECR:
DTC service request
DTC mode registers A and B DTC transfer count registers A and B DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC enable registers A to G DTC vector register
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 98 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
MRA MRB CRA CRB DAR SAR
Internal data bus
Register information
DTVECR
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2
Register Configuration
The DTC has the following registers. * * * * * * DTC mode register A (MRA) DTC mode register B (MRB) DTC source address register (SAR) DTC destination address register (DAR) DTC transfer count register A (CRA) DTC transfer count register B (CRB)
These six registers cannot be directly accessed from the CPU. When activated, the DTC reads a set of register information that is stored in on-chip RAM to the corresponding DTC registers and transfers data. After the data transfer, it writes a set of updated register information back to the RAM. * DTC enable registers (DTCER) * DTC vector register (DTVECR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 99 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.1
DTC Mode Register A (MRA)
MRA is an 8-bit register that selects the DTC operating mode.
Bit 7 6 Bit Name SM1 SM0 Initial Value Undefined Undefined R/W -- -- Description Source Address Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify an SAR operation after a data transfer. 0X: SAR is fixed 10: SAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 11: SAR is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when Sz = 0; by -2 when Sz = 1) 5 4 DM1 DM0 Undefined Undefined -- -- Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify a DAR operation after a data transfer. 0X: DAR is fixed 10: DAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 11: DAR is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when Sz = 0; by -2 when Sz = 1) 3 2 MD1 MD0 Undefined Undefined -- -- DTC Mode These bits specify the DTC transfer mode. 00: Normal mode 01: Repeat mode 10: Block transfer mode 11: Setting prohibited 1 DTS Undefined -- DTC Transfer Mode Select Specifies whether the source side or the destination side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. 0: Destination side is repeat area or block area 1: Source side is repeat area or block area 0 Sz Undefined -- DTC Data Transfer Size Specifies the size of data to be transferred. 0: Byte-size transfer 1: Word-size transfer [Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 100 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.2
DTC Mode Register B (MRB)
MRB is an 8-bit register that selects the DTC operating mode.
Bit 7 Bit Name CHNE Initial Value Undefined R/W -- Description DTC Chain Transfer Enable When this bit is set to 1, a chain transfer will be performed. For details, refer to section 8.5.4, Chain Transfer. In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the interrupt source flag, and clearing of DTCER, are not performed. 6 DISEL Undefined -- DTC Interrupt Select When this bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt request is generated every time after the end of a data transfer. When this bit is set to 0, a CPU interrupt request is generated at the time when the specified number of data transfer ends. 5 to 0 -- Undefined -- Reserved These bits have no effect on DTC operation. Only 0 should be written to these bits.
8.2.3
DTC Source Address Register (SAR)
SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even source address. 8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)
DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address. DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC. In normal mode, the entire CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 101 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
In repeat mode or block transfer mode, the CRA is divided into two parts; the upper 8 bits (CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent when the count reaches H'00. 8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)
CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. 8.2.6 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER)
DTCER is comprised of seven registers; DTCERA to DTCERG, and is a register that specifies DTC activation interrupt sources. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 8.1. For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR for reading and writing. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time (only at the initial setting) by writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTCE7 DTCE6 DTCE5 DTCE4 DTCE3 DTCE2 DTCE1 DTCE0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description DTC Activation Enable Setting this bit to 1 specifies a relevant interrupt source as a DTC activation source. [Clearing conditions] * * When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended When the specified number of transfers have ended
These bits are not cleared when the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not been completed
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 102 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.7
DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)
DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt.
Bit 7 Bit Name SWDTE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description DTC Software Activation Enable Setting this bit to 1 activates DTC. Only 1 can be written to this bit. [Clearing conditions] * * When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended When 0 s written to the DISEL bit after a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) request has been sent to the CPU.
When the DISEL bit is 1 and data transfer has ended or when the specified number of transfers have ended, this bit will not be cleared. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DTC Software Activation Vectors 0 to 6 These bits specify a vector number for DTC software activation. The vector address is expressed as H'0400 + (vector number x 2). For example, when DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420. When the bit SWDTE is 0, these bits can be written.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 103 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3
Activation Sources
The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software. An interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER bit. At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the activation source or corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. The activation source flag, in the case of RXI_0, for example, is the RDRF flag of SCI_0. When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, the existing CPU mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities. Figure 8.2 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Source flag cleared Clear controller Clear DTCER Select Clear request
IRQ interrupt
Interrupt request
Selection circuit
On-chip supporting module
DTC
DTVECR
Interrupt controller Interrupt mask
CPU
Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 104 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.4
Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table
Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEBC0 to H'FFEFBF). Register information should be located at an address that is a multiple of four within the range. Locating the register information in address space is shown in figure 8.3. Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address of the register information. In the case of chain transfer, register information should be located in consecutive areas and the register information start address should be located at the vector address corresponding to the interrupt source. The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. When the DTC is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + (DTVECR[6:0] x 2). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420. The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the register information start address.
Lower address 0 Register information start address MRA MRB Chain transfer CRA MRA MRB CRA SAR DAR CRB Register information for 2nd transfer in chain transfer 1 2 SAR DAR CRB Register information 3
4 bytes
Figure 8.3 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 105 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.1
Interrupt Source Software External pin
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs
Origin of Interrupt Source Write to DTVECR IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 Reserved for system use Vector Number DTVECR 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 28 32 33 34 35 40 41 44 45 48 49 50 51 56 57 60 61 DTC Vector Address H'0400 + (vector number x 2) H'0420 H'0422 H'0424 H'0426 H'0428 H'042A H'042C H'042E H'0438 H'0440 H'0442 H'0444 H'0446 H'0450 H'0452 H'0458 H'045A H'0460 H'0462 H'0464 H'0466 H'0470 H'0472 H'0478 H'047A DTCE* -- DTCEA7 DTCEA6 DTCEA5 DTCEA4 DTCEA3 DTCEA2 DTCEA1 DTCEA0 DTCEB6 DTCEB5 DTCEB4 DTCEB3 DTCEB2 DTCEB1 DTCEB0 DTCEC7 DTCEC6 DTCEC5 DTCEC4 DTCEC3 DTCEC2 DTCEC1 DTCEC0 DTCED5 DTCED4 Low Priority High
A/D TPU channel 0
ADI (A/D conversion end) TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0
TPU channel 1 TPU channel 2 TPU channel 3
TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3 TGID_3
TPU channel 4 TPU channel 5
TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TGIA_5 TGIB_5
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 106 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Interrupt Source --
Origin of Interrupt Source Reserved for system use
Vector Number 64 65 68 69 72 73 74 75
DTC Vector Address H'0480 H'0482 H'0488 H'048A H'0490 H'0492 H'0494 H'0496 H'04A2 H'04A4 H'04AA H'04AC H'04B2 H'04B4 H'04D0 H'04D2 H'04D4 H'04D6 H'04D8 H'04DA H'04DC H'04DE
DTCE* DTCED3 DTCED2 DTCED1 DTCED0 DTCEE7 DTCEE6 DTCEE5 DTCEE4 DTCEE3 DTCEE2 DTCEE1 DTCEE0 DTCEF7 DTCEF6 DTCEG7 DTCEG6 DTCEG5 DTCEG4 DTCEG3 DTCEG2 DTCEG1 DTCEG0
Priority High
SCI channel 0 SCI channel 1 SCI channel 2 --
RXI_0 TXI_0 RXI_1 TXI_1 RXI_2 TXI_2 Reserved for system use
81 82 85 86 89 90 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
Low
Note:
*
DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 107 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5
Operation
Register information is stored in on-chip memory. When activated, the DTC reads register information in on-chip memory and transfers data. After the data transfer, the DTC writes updated register information back to the memory. The pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. The transfer mode can be specified as normal, repeat, and block transfer mode. Setting the CHNE bit in MRB to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation source (chain transfer). The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address, and the 24-bit DAR designates the transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed depending on its register information.
Start
Read DTC vector Next transfer
Read register information
Data transfer
Write register information
CHNE = 1 No
Yes
Transfer Counter = 0 or DISEL = 1 No Clear an activation flag
Yes
Clear DTCER
End
Interrupt exception handling
Figure 8.4 Flowchart of DTC Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 108 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.1
Normal Mode
In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Table 8.2 lists the register information in normal mode. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have been completed, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Table 8.2
Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register A DTC transfer count register B
Register Information in Normal Mode
Abbreviation SAR DAR CRA CRB Function Designates source address Designates destination address Designates transfer count Not used
SAR Transfer
DAR
Figure 8.5 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 109 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.2
Repeat Mode
In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Table 8.3 lists the register information in repeat mode. From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored, and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0. Table 8.3
Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register AH DTC transfer count register AL DTC transfer count register B
Register Information in Repeat Mode
Abbreviation SAR DAR CRAH CRAL CRB Function Designates source address Designates destination address Holds number of transfers Designates transfer count Not used
SAR or DAR
Repeat area Transfer
DAR or SAR
Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 110 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.3
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination is designated as a block area. Table 8.4 lists the register information in block transfer mode. The block size can be between 1 and 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have been completed, a CPU interrupt is requested. Table 8.4
Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register AH DTC transfer count register AL DTC transfer count register B
Register Information in Block Transfer Mode
Abbreviation SAR DAR CRAH CRAL CRB Function Designates source address Designates destination address Holds block size Designates block size count Transfer count
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 111 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
First block
SAR or DAR
Block area Transfer
DAR or SAR
Nth block
Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 112 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.4
Chain Transfer
Setting the CHNE bit in MRB to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data transfers, can be set independently. Figure 8.8 shows the memory map for chain transfer. When activated, the DTC reads the register information start address stored at the vector address, and then reads the first register information at that start address. After the data transfer, the CHNE bit will be tested. When it has been set to 1, DTC reads the next register information located in a consecutive area and performs the data transfer. These sequences are repeated until the CHNE bit is cleared to 0. In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected.
Source
Destination
Register information CHNE = 1
DTC vector address
Register information start address Register information CHNE = 0
Source
Destination
Figure 8.8 Chain Transfer Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 113 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.5
Interrupts
An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC has completed the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. In the case of software activation, a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is generated. When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has been completed, or the specified number of transfers have been completed, after data transfer ends the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine will then clear the SWDTE bit to 0. When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1. 8.5.6
DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer
Read Write
Operation Timing
Vector read Address
Transfer information read
Transfer information write
Figure 8.9 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 114 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
DTC activation request DTC request Vector read Address Data transfer
Read Write Read Write
Transfer information read
Transfer information write
Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2)
DTC activation request DTC request Vector read Address
Read Write Read Write
Data transfer
Data transfer
Transfer information read
Transfer information write
Transfer information read
Transfer information write
Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer) 8.5.7 Number of DTC Execution States
Table 8.5 lists execution status for a single DTC data transfer, and table 8.6 shows the number of states required for each execution status.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 115 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.5
DTC Execution Status
Vector Read I 1 1 1 Register Information Read/Write Data Read J K 6 6 6 1 1 N Data Write L 1 1 N Internal Operations M 3 3 3
Mode Normal Repeat Block transfer
[Legend] N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL)
Table 8.6
Number of States Required for Each Execution Status
OnChip RAM 32 1 SI -- 1 1 1 1 1 OnChip ROM 16 1 1 -- 1 1 1 1 On-Chip I/O Registers 8 2 -- -- 2 4 2 4 16 2 -- -- 2 2 2 2 1 2 4 -- 2 4 2 4 External Devices* 8 3 6 + 2m -- 3+m 6 + 2m 3+m 6 + 2m 2 2 -- 2 2 2 2 16 3 3+m -- 3+m 3+m 3+m 3+m
Object to be Accessed Bus width Access states Execution status Vector read
Register information read/write SJ Byte data read Word data read Byte data write Word data write Internal operation SK SK SL SL SM
Note:
*
Cannot be used in this LSI.
The number of execution states is calculated from using the formula below. Note that is the sum of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1, plus 1). Number of execution states = I * (1 + SI) + (J * SJ + K * SK + L * SL) + M * SM For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in the on-chip ROM, normal mode is set, and data is transferred from on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, then the time required for the DTC operation is 13 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 116 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.6
8.6.1
Procedures for Using DTC
Activation by Interrupt
The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in on-chip RAM. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated. 5. After one data transfer has been completed, or after the specified number of data transfers have been completed, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1. Activation by Software
8.6.2
The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in on-chip RAM. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. Check that the SWDTE bit is 0. Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR. Check the vector number written to DTVECR. After one data transfer has been completed, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have been completed, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 117 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7
8.7.1
Examples of Use of the DTC
Normal Mode
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI. 1. Set MRA to a fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address. 3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. 4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. 5. Each time the reception of one byte of data has been completed on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. 6. When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have been completed, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt handling routine will perform wrap-up processing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 118 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7.2
Chain Transfer
An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG. Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG's NDR is performed in the first half of the chain transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU's TGR in the second half. This is because clearing of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0). 1. Perform settings for transfer to the PPG's NDR. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), a fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0, MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set MRB to chain mode (CHNE = 1, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start address in SAR, the NDRH address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL. CRB can be set to any value. 2. Perform settings for transfer to the TPU's TGR. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), a fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA address in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. 3. Locate the TPU transfer register information consecutively after the NDR transfer register information. 4. Set the start address of the NDR transfer register information to the DTC vector address. 5. Set the bit corresponding to TGIA in DTCER to 1. 6. Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA interrupt with TIER. 7. Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match to be used as the output trigger. 8. Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation. 9. Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and the set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source TGFA flag is cleared. 10. When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 119 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7.3
Software Activation
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0. 1. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR, and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0). 3. Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated by software. 4. Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0. 5. Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps 3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3. 6. If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred. 7. After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 120 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.8
8.8.1
Usage Notes
Module Stop Mode Setting
DTC operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for DTC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes. 8.8.2 On-Chip RAM
The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0. 8.8.3 DTCE Bit Setting
For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time (only at the initial setting) by writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 121 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 122 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions such as input/output or interrupt input pins of on-chip supporting modules. Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register (DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only ports do not have a DR or DDR register. Ports A to D have a built-in input pull-up MOS function and a MOS input pull-up control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of MOS input pull-up. Ports A to C include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of the output buffer PMOS. All the I/O ports can drive a single TTL load and a 30 pF capacitive load.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 123 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1
Port Port 1
Port Functions
Description General I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins, PPG output pins, and interrupt input pins Port and Other Functions Name P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0 P10/PO8/TIOCA0 Input/Output and Output Type
Port 4
General input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs
P47/AN7 P46/AN6 P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3 P42/AN2 P41/AN1 P40/AN0
Port 9
General input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs
P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8
Port A
General I/O port also functioning as SCI_2 I/O pins
PA3/SCK2 PA2/RxD2 PA1/TxD2 PA0
Built-in MOS input pull-up Push-pull or open-drain output selectable
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 124 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port Port B
Description General I/O port also functioning as TPU_5, TPU_4, and TPU_3 I/O pins
Port and Other Functions Name PB7/TIOCB5 PB6/TIOCA5 PB5/TIOCB4 PB4/TIOCA4 PB3/TIOCD3 PB2/TIOCC3 PB1/TIOCB3 PB0/TIOCA3
Input/Output and Output Type Built-in MOS input pull-up Push-pull or open-drain output selectable
Port C
General I/O port also functioning as SCI_1 and SCI_0 I/O pins, and interrupt input pins
PC7 PC6 PC5/SCK1/IRQ5 PC4/RxD1 PC3/TxD1 PC2/SCK0/IRQ4 PC1/RxD0 PC0/TxD0
Built-in MOS input pull-up Push-pull or open-drain output selectable
Port D
General I/O port
PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
Built-in MOS input pull-up
Port F
General I/O port also functioning as interrupt input pins, an A/D converter start trigger input pin, and a system clock output pin ()
PF7/ PF6 PF5 PF4
PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF2 PF1 PF0/IRQ2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 125 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1
Port 1
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port and has the following registers. * Port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) * Port 1 data register (P1DR) * Port 1 register (PORT1) 9.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 126 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.2
Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)
P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 1 pins.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port.
9.1.3
Port 1 Register (PORT1)
PORT1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. PORT1 cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 * Initial Value Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Determined by the states of pins P17 to P10.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 127 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.4
Pin Functions
Port 1 pins also function as TPU I/O pins, PPG output pins, and interrupt input pins. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. Table 9.2 P17 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCB2 output 0 -- P17 input TIOCB2 input TCLKD input Note: * For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 0 P17 output 1 1 PO15 output
TPU channel 2 setting* P17DDR NDER15 Pin function
Table 9.3
P16 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCA2 output 0 -- P16 input TIOCA2 input IRQ1 input Input or initial value 1 0 P16 output 1 1 PO14 output
TPU channel 2 setting * P16DDR NDER14 Pin function
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 128 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.4
P15 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCB1 output 0 -- P15 input TIOCB1 input TCLKC input Input or initial value 1 0 P15 output 1 1 PO13 output
TPU channel 1 setting* P15DDR NDER13 Pin function
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Table 9.5
P14 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCA1 output 0 -- P14 input TIOCA1 input IRQ0 input Input or initial value 1 0 P14 output 1 1 PO12 output
TPU channel 1 setting* P14DDR NDER12 Pin function
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Table 9.6
P13 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCD0 output 0 -- P13 input TIOCD0 input TCLKB input Input or initial value 1 0 P13 output 1 1 PO11 output
TPU channel 0 setting* P13DDR NDER11 Pin function
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 129 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.7
P12 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCC0 output 0 -- P12 input TIOCC0 input TCLKA input Input or initial value 1 0 P12 output 1 1 PO10 output
TPU channel 0 setting* P12DDR NDER10 Pin function
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Table 9.8
P11 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCB0 output 0 -- P11 input TIOCB0 input Input or initial value 1 0 P11 output 1 1 PO9 output
TPU channel 0 setting* P11DDR NDER9 Pin function Note: *
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Table 9.9
P10 Pin Function
Output -- -- TIOCA0 output 0 -- P10 input TIOCA0 input Input or initial value 1 0 P10 output 1 1 PO8 output
TPU channel 0 setting* P10DDR NDER8 Pin function Note: *
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 130 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2
Port 4
Port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins. * Port 4 register (PORT4) 9.2.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4)
PORT4 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port 4 pin states. PORT4 cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name P47 P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40 * Initial Value Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description The pin states are always read when a port 4 read is performed.
Determined by the states of pins P47 to P40.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 131 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3
Port 9
Port 9 is a 4-bit input-only port. Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins. Port 9 has the following register. * Port 9 register (PORT9) 9.3.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9)
PORT9 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port 9 pin states. PORT9 cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name -- -- -- -- P93 P92 P91 P90 * Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is performed.
Determined by the states of pins P93 to P90.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 132 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4
Port A
Port A is a 4-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port A has the following registers. * * * * * Port A data direction register (PADDR) Port A data register (PADR) Port A register (PORTA) Port A pull-up MOS control register (PAPCR) Port A open-drain control register (PAODR) Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)
9.4.1
PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of port A are used for input or output. PADDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- -- -- -- PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 R/W -- -- -- -- W W W W When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. Description Reserved
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 133 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.2
Port A Data Register (PADR)
PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port A pins.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- -- -- -- PA3DR PA2DR PA1DR PA0DR Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 R/W -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port. Description Reserved These bits are read as an undefined value.
9.4.3
Port A Register (PORTA)
PORTA is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port A pin states. PORTA cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name -- -- -- -- PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 * Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W -- -- -- -- R R R R If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Description Reserved These bits are read as an undefined value.
Determined by the states of pins PA3 to PA0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 134 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.4
Port A Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PAPCR)
PAPCR is an 8-bit register that controls the MOS input pull-up function.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- -- -- -- PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 R/W -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W When a pin is specified as an input port, setting the corresponding bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin. Description Reserved These bits are read as an undefined value.
9.4.5
Port A Open-Drain Control Register (PAODR)
PAODR is an 8-bit read/write register that specifies the output type of port A.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- -- -- -- PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 R/W -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W When a pin is specified as an output port, setting the corresponding bit to 1 specifies pin output to open-drain and the MOS input pull-up to the off state. Clearing this bit to 0 specifies that to pushpull output. Description Reserved These bits are read as an undefined value.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 135 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.6
Pin Functions
Port A pins also function as SCI_2 I/O and interrupt input pins. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. Table 9.10 PA3 Pin Function
CKE1 C/A CKE0 PA3DDR Pin function 0 PA3 input 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- SCK2 output 1 -- -- -- SCK2 input
PA3 output SCK2 output
Table 9.11 PA2 Pin Function
RE PA2DDR Pin function 0 PA2 input 0 1 PA2 output 1 -- RxD2 input
Table 9.12 PA1 Pin Function
TE PA1DDR Pin function 0 PA1 input 0 1 PA1 output 1 -- TxD2 output
Table 9.13 PA0 Pin Function
PA0DDR Pin function 0 PA0 input 1 PA0 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 136 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5
Port B
Port B is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port B has the following registers. * * * * * Port B data direction register (PBDDR) Port B data register (PBDR) Port B register (PORTB) Port B pull-up MOS control register (PBPCR) Port B open-drain control register (PBODR) Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)
9.5.1
PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of port B are used for input or output. PBDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 137 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.2
Port B Data Register (PBDR)
PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port B pins.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7DR PB6DR PB5DR PB4DR PB3DR PB2DR PB1DR PB0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port.
9.5.3
Port B Register (PORTB)
PORTB is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port B pin states. PORTB cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 * Initial Value Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port B read is performed while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a port B read is performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Determined by the states of pins PB7 to PB0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 138 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.4
Port B Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PBPCR)
PBPCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the on/off state of MOS input pull-up of port B.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When a pin is specified as an input port, setting the corresponding bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin.
9.5.5
Port B Open-Drain Control Register (PBODR)
PBODR is an 8-bit read/write register that specifies the output type of port B.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When a pin function is specified as an output port, setting the corresponding bit to 1 specifies pin output as open-drain and the PMOS input pull-up to the off state. Clearing this bit to 0 specifies pushpull output.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 139 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.6
Pin Functions
Port B pins also function as TPU I/O pins. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. Table 9.14 PB7 Pin Function
TPU channel 5 setting* PB7DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCB5 output 0 PB7 input TIOCB5 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB7 output
Table 9.15 PB6 Pin Function
TPU channel 5 setting* PB6DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCA5 output 0 PB6 input TIOCA5 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB6 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 140 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.16
TPU channel 4 setting* PB5DDR Pin function Note: *
PB5 Pin Function
Output -- TIOCB4 output 0 PB5 input TIOCB4 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB5 output
Table 9.17 PB4 Pin Function
TPU channel 4 setting* PB4DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCA4 output 0 PB4 input TIOCA4 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB4 output
Table 9.18 PB3 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting* PB3DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCD3 output 0 PB3 input TIOCD3 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB3 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 141 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.19 PB2 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting* PB2DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCC3 output 0 PB2 input TIOCC3 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB2 output
Table 9.20 PB1 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting* PB1DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCB3 output 0 PB1 input TIOCB3 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB1 output
Table 9.21 PB0 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting* PB0DDR Pin function Note: * Output -- TIOCA3 output 0 PB0 input TIOCA3 input For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU). Input or initial value 1 PB0 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 142 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6
Port C
Port C is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port C has the following registers. * * * * * Port C data direction register (PCDDR) Port C data register (PCDR) Port C register (PORTC) Port C MOS pull-up control register (PCPCR) Port C open-drain control register (PCODR) Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)
9.6.1
PCDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of port C are used for input or output. PCDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 143 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.2
Port C Data Register (PCDR)
PCDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port C pins.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7DR PC6DR PC5DR PC4DR PC3DR PC2DR PC1DR PC0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port.
9.6.3
Port C Register (PORTC)
PORTC is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port C pin states. PORTC cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 * Initial Value Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Determined by the states of pins PC7 to PC0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 144 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.4
Port C Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PCPCR)
PCPCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the on/off state of MOS input pull-up of port C.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When a pin is specified as an input port, setting the corresponding bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin.
9.6.5
Port C Open-Drain Control Register (PCODR)
PCODR is an 8-bit read/write register that specifies an output type of port C.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7ODR PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When a pin is specified as an output port, setting the corresponding bit to 1 specifies pin output as open-drain and the MOS input pull-up to the off state. Clearing this bit to 0 specifies push-pull output.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 145 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.6
Pin Functions
Port C pins also function as SCI_1 and SCI_0 I/O and interrupt input. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. Table 9.22 PC7 Pin Function
PC7DDR Pin function 0 PC7 input 1 PC7 output
Table 9.23 PC6 Pin Function
PC6DDR Pin function 0 PC6 input 1 PC6 output
Table 9.24 PC5 Pin Function
CKE1 C/A CKE0 PC5DDR Pin function 0 PC5 input IRQ5 input 0 1 PC5 output 0 1 -- SCK1 output 0 1 -- -- SCK1 output 1 -- -- -- SCK1 input
Table 9.25 PC4 Pin Function
RE PC4DDR Pin function 0 PC4 input 0 1 PC4 output 1 -- RxD1 input
Table 9.26 PC3 Pin Function
TE PC3DDR Pin function 0 PC3 input 0 1 PC3 output 1 -- TxD1 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 146 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.27 PC2 Pin Function
CKE1 C/A CKE0 PC2DDR Pin function 0 PC2 input IRQ4 input 0 1 PC2 output 0 1 -- SCK0 output 0 1 -- -- SCK0 output 1 -- -- -- SCK0 input
Table 9.28 PC1 Pin Function
RE PC1DDR Pin function 0 PC1 input 0 1 PC1 output 1 -- RxD0 input
Table 9.29 PC0 Pin function
TE PC0DDR Pin function 0 PC0 input 0 1 PC0 output 1 -- TxD0 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 147 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7
Port D
Port D is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port D has the following registers. * * * * Port D data direction register (PDDDR) Port D data register (PDDR) Port D register (PORTD) Port D pull-up MOS control register (PDPCR) Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR)
9.7.1
PDDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of port D are used for input or output. PDDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
9.7.2
Port D Data Register (PDDR)
PDDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port D pins.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD7DR PD6DR PD5DR PD4DR PD3DR PD2DR PD1DR PD0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 148 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.3
Port D Register (PORTD)
PORTD is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port D pin states. PORTD cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 * Initial Value Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Determined by the states of pins PD7 to PD0.
9.7.4
Port D Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PDPCR)
PDPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls on/off states of the input pull-up MOS of port D.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When the pin is in its input state, the input pull-up MOS of the input pin is on when the corresponding bit is set to 1.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 149 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8
Port F
Port F is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port F has the following registers. * Port F data direction register (PFDDR) * Port F data register (PFDR) * Port F register (PORTF) 9.8.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR)
PFDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of port F are used for input or output. PFDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit 7 Bit Name PF7DDR Initial Value 0 R/W W Description When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the PF7 pin a output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin an output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
W W W W W W W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 150 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.2
Port F Data Register (PFDR)
PFDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port F pins.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- PF6DR PF5DR PF4DR PF3DR PF2DR PF1DR PF0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to this bit. Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is specified as a general purpose I/O port.
9.8.3
Port F Register (PORTF)
PORTF is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port F pin states. PORTF cannot be modified.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PF7 PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0 * Initial Value Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Determined by the states of pins PF7 to PF0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 151 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.4
Pin Functions
Port F is an 8-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input, IRQ2 and IRQ3, A/D trigger input (ADTRG), and system clock output (). Table 9.30 PF7 Pin Function
PF7DDR Pin function 0 PF7 input 1
output
Table 9.31 PF6 Pin Function
PF6DDR Pin function 0 PF6 input 1 PF6 output
Table 9.32 PF5 Pin Function
PF5DDR Pin function 0 PF5 input 1 PF5 output
Table 9.33 PF4 Pin Function
PF4DDR Pin function 0 PF4 input 1 PF4 output
Table 9.34 PF3 Pin Function
PF3DDR Pin function 0 PF3 input ADTRG input*1
2 IRQ3 input*
1 PF3 output
Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1. 2. When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O pin for another function.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 152 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.35 PF2 Pin Function
PF2DDR Pin function 0 PF2 input 1 PF2 output
Table 9.36 PF1 Pin Function
PF1DDR Pin function 0 PF1 input 1 PF1 output
Table 9.37 PF0 Pin Function
PFDDR Pin function 0 PF0 input IRQ2 input 1 PF0 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 153 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 154 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
This LSI has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) comprised of six 16-bit timer channels. The function list of the 16-bit timer unit and its block diagram are shown in table 10.1 and figure 10.1, respectively.
10.1
Features
* Maximum 16-pulse input/output * Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel * The following operations can be set for each channel Waveform output at compare match Input capture function Counter clear operation Synchronous operation Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture is possible Register simultaneous input/output is possible by synchronous counter operation A maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible in combination with synchronous operation * Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3 * Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 * Cascaded operation * Fast access via internal 16-bit bus * 26 interrupt sources * Automatic transfer of register data * Programmable pulse generator (PPG) output trigger can be generated * A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated * Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 155 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.1 TPU Functions
Item Count clock Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 /1 /4 /16 /64 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TGR compare match or input capture
O O O
/1 /4 /16 /64 /256 TCLKA TCLKB TGRA_1 TGRB_1 -- TIOCA1 TIOCB1
/1 /4 /16 /64 /1024 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TGRA_2 TGRB_2 -- TIOCA2 TIOCB2
/1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 TCLKA TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TGR compare match or input capture
O O O
/1 /4 /16 /64 /1024 TCLKA TCLKC TGRA_4 TGRB_4 -- TIOCA4 TIOCB4
/1 /4 /16 /64 /256 TCLKA TCLKC TCLKD TGRA_5 TGRB_5 -- TIOCA5 TIOCB5
General registers General registers/ buffer registers I/O pins
Counter clear function
TGR compare match or input capture
O O O
TGR compare match or input capture
O O O
TGR compare match or input capture
O O O
TGR compare match or input capture
O O O
Compare 0 output match 1 output output Toggle output Input capture function Synchronous operation PWM mode Phase counting mode Buffer operation
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O O
O O
--
O
--
O
--
--
--
--
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 156 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_1 compare match or input capture TGRA_1/ TGRB_1 compare match or input capture 4 sources * Compare match or input capture 1A * Compare match or input capture 1B
Channel 2 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_2 compare match or input capture TGRA_2/ TGRB_2 compare match or input capture 4 sources * Compare match or input capture 2A * Compare match or input capture 2B * Overflow * Underflow
Channel 3 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_3 compare match or input capture
Channel 4 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_4 compare match or input capture
Channel 5 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_5 compare match or input capture --
DTC TGR activation compare match or input capture A/D TGRA_0 converter compare trigger match or input capture PPG trigger TGRA_0/ TGRB_0 compare match or input capture 5 sources * Compare match or input capture 0A * Compare match or input capture 0B
TGRA_3/ -- TGRB_3 compare match or input capture 5 sources * Compare match or input capture 3A * Compare match or input capture 3B 4 sources * Compare match or input capture 4A * Compare match or input capture 4B
Interrupt sources
4 sources * Compare match or input capture 5A * Compare match or input capture 5B * Overflow * Underflow
* Overflow * Compare match or * Underflow input capture 0C * Compare match or input capture 0D * Overflow [Legend]
O: Possible --: Not possible
* Overflow * Compare match or * Underflow input capture 3C * Compare match or input capture 3D * Overflow
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 157 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TIORH TIORL
TMDR
Channel 3
TSR
TGRC
TGRD
TGRA
TGRB
TCNT
Channel 3:
TIOR
Channel 5:
TMDR
Channel 5
TSR
TIER
TCR
Channel 4:
TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 TIOCA5 TIOCB5
Control logic for channels 3 to 5
Input/output pins
TGRA
TIOR
Clock input Internal clock:
/1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD
TIER
TCR
Module data bus
TSYR
TGRB
TCNT
Interrupt request signals Channel 3: TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3 TGID_3 TCIV_3 Channel 4: TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TCIV_4 TCIU_4 Channel 5: TGIA_5 TGIB_5 TCIV_5 TCIU_5
TMDR
Channel 4
TSR
TIER
TCR
TGRA
TGRB
TCNT
Control logic
Common
Internal data bus
Bus interface
External clock:
TSTR
A/D converter convertion start signal PPG output trigger signal
TMDR
Channel 2
TSR
TGRA
TIOR
Channel 0:
Channel 2:
TIORH TIORL
TMDR
Channel 0
TSR
TIER
TCR
Channel 1:
TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2
Control logic for channels 0 to 2
Input/output pins
TIER
TCR
TGRB
TCNT
Interrupt request signals Channel 3: TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0 TCIV_0 Channel 4: TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TCIV_1 TCIU_1 Channel 5: TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TCIV_2 TCIU_2
TMDR
Channel 1
TSR
TIOR
TGRA
TGRB TGRC TGRD TGRB
TCNT TCNT
[Legend] TSTR: Timer start register TSYR: Timer synchro register TCR: Timer control register TMDR: Timer mode register
TIOR (H, L): Timer I/O control registers (H, L) Timer interrupt enable register TIER: Timer status register TSR: TGR (A to D): TImer general registers (A to D)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 158 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
TIER
TCR
TGRA
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 10.2 TPU Pins
Channel All Symbol TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD 0 TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 1 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 2 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 3 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 4 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 5 TIOCA5 TIOCB5 I/O Input Input Input Input I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Function External clock A input pin (Channels 1 and 5 phase counting mode A phase input) External clock B input pin (Channels 1 and 5 phase counting mode B phase input) External clock C input pin (Channels 2 and 4 phase counting mode A phase input) External clock D input pin (Channels 2 and 4 phase counting mode B phase input) TGRA_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 159 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3
Register Descriptions
The TPU has the following registers. To distinguish registers in each channel, an underscore and the channel number are added as a suffix to the register name; TCR for channel 0 is expressed as TCR_0. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Timer control register_0 (TCR_0) Timer mode register_0 (TMDR_0) Timer I/O control register H_0 (TIORH_0) Timer I/O control register L_0 (TIORL_0) Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0) Timer status register_0 (TSR_0) Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0) Timer general register A_0 (TGRA_0) Timer general register B_0 (TGRB_0) Timer general register C_0 (TGRC_0) Timer general register D_0 (TGRD_0) Timer control register_1 (TCR_1) Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1) Timer I/O control register _1 (TIOR_1) Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1) Timer status register_1 (TSR_1) Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1) Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1) Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1) Timer control register_2 (TCR_2) Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2) Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2) Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2) Timer status register_2 (TSR_2) Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2) Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2) Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2) Timer control register_3 (TCR_3) Timer mode register_3 (TMDR_3)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 160 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Timer I/O control register H_3 (TIORH_3) Timer I/O control register L_3 (TIORL_3) Timer interrupt enable register_3 (TIER_3) Timer status register_3 (TSR_3) Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3) Timer general register A_3 (TGRA_3) Timer general register B_3 (TGRB_3) Timer general register C_3 (TGRC_3) Timer general register D_3 (TGRD_3) Timer control register_4 (TCR_4) Timer mode register_4 (TMDR_4) Timer I/O control register _4 (TIOR_4) Timer interrupt enable register_4 (TIER_4) Timer status register_4 (TSR_4) Timer counter_4 (TCNT_4) Timer general register A_4 (TGRA_4) Timer general register B_4 (TGRB_4) Timer control register_5 (TCR_5) Timer mode register_5 (TMDR_5) Timer I/O control register_5 (TIOR_5) Timer interrupt enable register_5 (TIER_5) Timer status register_5 (TSR_5) Timer counter_5 (TCNT_5) Timer general register A_5 (TGRA_5) Timer general register B_5 (TGRB_5)
Common Registers: * Timer start register (TSTR) * Timer synchro register (TSYR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 161 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
The TCR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the TCNT operation for each channel. The TPU has a total of six TCR registers, one for each channel (channels 0 to 5). TCR register settings should be conducted only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Bit Name CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Counter Clear 0 to 2 These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source. See tables 10.3 and 10.4 for details. Clock Edge 0 and 1 These bits select the input clock edge. When the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. /4 both edges = /2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority. Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is /4 or slower. This setting is ignored if the input clock is /1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected. 00: Count at rising edge 01: Count at falling edge 1X: Count at both edges [Legend] X: Don't care 2 1 0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Time Prescaler 0 to 2 These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock source can be selected independently for each channel. See tables10.5 to10.10 for details.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 162 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.3 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (Channels 0 and 3)
Channel 0, 3 Bit 7 CCLR2 0 Bit 6 CCLR1 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ 1 synchronous operation* TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input 2 capture* TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input capture*2 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is set by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur.
Table 10.4 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5)
Channel 1, 2, 4, 5 Bit 7 Bit 6 Reserved*2 CCLR1 0 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is selected by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 163 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.5 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 0)
Channel 0 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
Table 10.6 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 1)
Channel 1 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input Internal clock: counts on /256 Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 164 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.7 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 2)
Channel 2 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on /1024
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode.
Table 10.8 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 3)
Channel 3 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input Internal clock: counts on /1024 Internal clock: counts on /256 Internal clock: counts on /4096
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 165 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.9 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 4)
Channel 4 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on /1024 Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode.
Table 10.10
Channel 5
TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 5)
Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on /256 External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 166 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.2
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
The TMDR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode of each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each channel. TMDR register settings should be changed only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial value All 1 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 5 BFB 0 R/W Buffer Operation B Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way, or TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: TGRB operates normally 1: TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation 4 BFA 0 R/W Buffer Operation A Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way, or TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: TGRA operates normally 1: TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation 3 2 1 0 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Modes 0 to 3 These bits are used to set the timer operating mode. MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be written with 0. See table 10.11 for details.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 167 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.11
Bit 3 1 MD3* 0
MD0 to MD3
Bit 1 MD1 0 Bit 0 MD0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Normal operation Reserved PWM mode 1 PWM mode 2 Phase counting mode 1 Phase counting mode 2 Phase counting mode 3 Phase counting mode 4 --
Bit 2 MD2*2 0
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
X
X
X
[Legend] X: Don't care Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be written with 0. 2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always be written to MD2.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 168 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.3
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
The TIOR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the TGR registers. The TPU has eight TIOR registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. Care is required as TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified. When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register. TIORH_0, TIOR_1, TIOR_2, TIORH_3, TIOR_4, TIOR_5
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control B0 to B3 Specify the function of TGRB.
I/O Control A0 to A3 Specify the function of TGRA.
TIORL_0, TIORL_3
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control D0 to D3 Specify the function of TGRD.
I/O Control C0 to C3 Specify the function of TGRC.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 169 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.12
TIORH_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 7 IOB3 0
Bit 6 IOB2 0
Bit 5 IOB1 0
Bit 4 IOB0 0 1
TGRB_0 Function Output compare register
TIOCB_0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down*
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care Note: * When bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 170 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.13
TIORL_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 7 IOD3 0
Bit 6 IOD2 0
Bit 5 IOD1 0
Bit 4 IOD0 0 1
TGRD_0 Function Output Compare 2 register*
TIOCD_0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register*2
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
1 Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down*
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care Notes: 1. When bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRD_0 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 171 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.14
TIOR_1 (Channel 1)
Description
Bit 7 IOB3 0
Bit 6 IOB2 0
Bit 5 IOB1 0
Bit 4 IOB0 0 1
TGRB_1 Function Output compare register
TIOCB_1 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges TGRC_0 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of TGRC_0 compare match/input capture
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 172 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.15
TIOR_2 (Channel 2)
Description
Bit 7 IOB3 0
Bit 6 IOB2 0
Bit 5 IOB1 0
Bit 4 IOB0 0 1
TGRB_2 Function Output compare register
TIOCB_2 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
X
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges
1 [Legend] X: Don't care
X
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 173 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.16
TIORH_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 7 IOB3 0
Bit 6 IOB2 0
Bit 5 IOB1 0
Bit 4 IOB0 0 1
TGRB_3 Function Output compare register
TIOCB_3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down*
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care Note: * When bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 174 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.17
TIORL_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 7 IOD3 0
Bit 6 IOD2 0
Bit 5 IOD1 0
Bit 4 IOD0 0 1
TGRD_3 Function Output compare 2 register*
TIOCD_3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register*2
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
1 Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down*
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care Notes: 1. When bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRD_3 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 175 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.18
TIOR_4 (Channel 4)
Description
Bit 7 IOB3 0
Bit 6 IOB2 0
Bit 5 IOB1 0
Bit 4 IOB0 0 1
TGRB_4 Function Output compare register
TIOCB_4 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is TGRC_3 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of TGRC_3 compare match/input capture
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 176 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.19
TIOR_5 (Channel 5)
Description
Bit 7 IOB3 0
Bit 6 IOB2 0
Bit 5 IOB1 0
Bit 4 IOB0 0 1
TGRB_5 Function Output compare register
TIOCB_5 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
X
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges
1 [Legend] X: Don't care
X
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 177 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.20
TIORH_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 3 IOA3 0
Bit 2 IOA2 0
Bit 1 IOA1 0
Bit 0 IOA0 0 1
TGRA_0 Function Output compare register
TIOCA_0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down
1 1 [Legend] X: Don't care X
X X
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 178 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.21
TIORL_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 3 IOC3 0
Bit 2 IOC2 0
Bit 1 IOC1 0
Bit 0 IOC0 0 1
TGRC_0 Function Output compare register*
TIOCC_0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register*
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRC_0 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 179 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.22
TIOR_1 (Channel 1)
Description
Bit 3 IOA3 0
Bit 2 IOA2 0
Bit 1 IOA1 0
Bit 0 IOA0 0 1
TGRA_1 Function Output compare register
TIOCA_1 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is TGRA_0 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of channel 0/TGRA_0 compare match/input capture
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 180 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.23
TIOR_2 (Channel 2)
Description
Bit 3 IOA3 0
Bit 2 IOA2 0
Bit 1 IOA1 0
Bit 0 IOA0 0 1
TGRA_2 Function Output compare register
TIOCA_2 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
X
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges
1 [Legend] X: Don't care
X
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 181 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.24
TIORH_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 3 IOA3 0
Bit 2 IOA2 0
Bit 1 IOA1 0
Bit 0 IOA0 0 1
TGRA_3 Function Output compare register
TIOCA_3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down
1 1 [Legend] X: Don't care X
X X
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 182 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.25
TIORL_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 3 IOC3 0
Bit 2 IOC2 0
Bit 1 IOC1 0
Bit 0 IOC0 0 1
TGRC_3 Function Output compare register*
TIOCC_3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register*
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRC_3 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 183 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.26
TIOR_4 (Channel 4)
Description
Bit 3 IOA3 0
Bit 2 IOA2 0
Bit 1 IOA1 0
Bit 0 IOA0 0 1
TGRA_4 Function Output compare register
TIOCA_4 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
0
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is TGRA_3 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of TGRA_3 compare match/input capture
1 1 X
X X
[Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 184 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.27
TIOR_5 (Channel 5)
Description
Bit 3 IOA3 0
Bit 2 IOA2 0
Bit 1 IOA1 0
Bit 0 IOA0 0 1
TGRA_5 Function Output compare register
TIOCA_5 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
1
0 1
1
X
0
0 1
Input capture register
Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges
1 [Legend] X: Don't care
X
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 185 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
The TIER registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU has six TIER registers, one for each channel.
Bit 7 Bit Name TTGE Initial value 0 R/W R/W Description A/D Conversion Start Request Enable Enables or disables generation of A/D conversion start requests by TGRA input capture/compare match. 0: A/D conversion start request generation disabled 1: A/D conversion start request generation enabled 6 5 -- TCIEU 1 0 -- R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Underflow Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by the TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled 4 TCIEV 0 R/W Overflow Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled 3 TGIED 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable D Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 186 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 2
Bit Name TGIEC
Initial value 0
R/W R/W
Description TGR Interrupt Enable C Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled
1
TGIEB
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable B Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled
0
TGIEA
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable A Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 187 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.5
Timer Status Register (TSR)
The TSR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that indicate the status of each channel. The TPU has six TSR registers, one for each channel.
Bit 7 Bit Name TCFD Initial value 1 R/W R Description Count Direction Flag Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 0: TCNT counts down 1: TCNT counts up 6 5 -- TCFU 1 0 -- R/(W) Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Underflow Flag Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has occurred when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase counting mode. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. [Setting condition] * When the TCNT value underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF) When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1
[Clearing condition] * 4 TCFV 0 R/(W) Overflow Flag Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has occurred. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. [Setting condition] * When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000 ) When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1
[Clearing condition] *
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 188 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 3
Bit Name TGFD
Initial value 0
R/W R/(W)
Description Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRD and TGRD is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input capture signal and TGRD is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGID interrupt and the DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1
[Clearing conditions] * * 2 TGFC 0 R/(W)
Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRC and TGRC is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input capture signal and TGRC is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIC interrupt and the DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1
[Clearing conditions] * *
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 189 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 1
Bit Name TGFB
Initial value 0
R/W R/(W)
Description Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input capture or compare match. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRB and TGRB is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input capture signal and TGRB is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIB interrupt and the DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1
[Clearing conditions] * * 0 TGFA 0 R/(W)
Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input capture or compare match. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRA and TGRA is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input capture signal and TGRA is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIA interrupt and the DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1
[Clearing conditions] * *
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 190 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.6
Timer Counter (TCNT)
The TCNT registers are 16-bit readable/writable counters. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one for each channel. The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. 10.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR)
The TGR registers are dual function 16-bit readable/writable registers, functioning as either output compare or input capture registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for operation as buffer registers. The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA- TGRC and TGRB-TGRD. 10.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR)
TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5. When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter.
Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- CST5 CST4 CST3 CST2 CST1 CST0 Initial value All 0 0 R/W -- R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. Counter Start 0 to 5 These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT. If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. 0: TCNT_0 to TCNT_5 count operation is stopped 1: TCNT_0 to TCNT_5 performs count operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 191 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.9
Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)
TSYR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the channel 0 to 5 TCNT counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1.
Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0 Initial value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. Timer Synchro 0 to 5 These bits are used to select whether operation is independent of or synchronized with other channels. When synchronous operation is selected, the TCNT synchronous presetting of multiple channels, and synchronous clearing by counter clearing on another channel, are possible. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit, the TCNT clearing source must also be set by means of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in TCR. 0: TCNT_0 to TCNT_5 operates independently (TCNT presetting /clearing is unrelated to other channels) 1: TCNT_0 to TCNT_5 performs synchronous operation TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 192 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4
10.4.1
Operation
Basic Functions
Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of free-running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting. Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register. Counter Operation: When one of bits CST0 to CST5 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for the corresponding channel begins counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, for example. 1. Example of count operation setting procedure Figure 10.2 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] For periodic counter operation, select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. [3] Designate the TGR selected in [2] as an output compare register by means of TIOR. [4] Set the periodic counter cycle in the TGR selected in [2]. [5] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the counter operation.
Operation selection
Select counter clock
[1]
Periodic counter
Free-running counter
Select counter clearing source
[2]
[3] Select output compare register
Set period
[4]
Start count operation
[5]
Start count operation
Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 193 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. Free-running count operation and periodic count operation Immediately after a reset, the TPU's TCNT counters are all designated as free-running counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts upcount operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000), the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 10.3 illustrates free-running counter operation.
TCNT value H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts up-count operation as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000. If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 10.4 illustrates periodic counter operation.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 194 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCNT value TGR
Counter cleared by TGR compare match
H'0000
Time
CST bit Flag cleared by software or DTC activation TGF
Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation Waveform Output by Compare Match: The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output pin using compare match. 1. Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match Figure 10.5 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match.
[1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and compare match output value 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set initial value is output at the TIOC pin unit the first compare match occurs. [2] Set the timing for compare match generation in TGR. [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation.
Output selection
Select waveform output mode
[1]
Set output timing
[2]
Start count operation
[3]

Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 195 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. Examples of waveform output operation Figure 10.6 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. In this example TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been made such that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value H'FFFF TGRA TGRB H'0000 No change TIOCA TIOCB No change No change No change 1 output 0 output Time
Figure 10.6 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation Figure 10.7 shows an example of toggle output. In this example, TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing on compare match B), and settings have been made such that the output is toggled by both compare match A and compare match B.
TCNT value Counter cleared by TGRB compare match H'FFFF TGRB TGRA H'0000 Time Toggle output Toggle output
TIOCB TIOCA
Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 196 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC pin input edge. Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. For channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel's counter input clock or compare match signal as the input capture source. Note: When another channel's counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels 0 and 3, /1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input. Input capture will not be generated if /1 is selected. 1. Example of input capture operation setting procedure Figure 10.8 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure.
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input capture source and input signal edge. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. [1]
Input selection
Select input capture input
Start count
[2]

Figure 10.8 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 197 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. Example of input capture operation Figure 10.9 shows an example of input capture operation. In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge, the falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT.
Counter cleared by TIOCB input (falling edge)
TCNT value H'0180 H'0160
H'0010 H'0005 H'0000 Time
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB TGRB H'0180
Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 198 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.2
Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing). Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base. Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation. Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.10 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure.
Synchronous operation selection Set synchronous operation [1]
Synchronous presetting
Synchronous clearing
Set TCNT
[2]
Clearing source generation channel? Yes Select counter clearing source Start count
No
[3]
Set synchronous counter clearing Start count
[4]
[4]
[5]



[1] Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous operation. [2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters. [3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare, etc. [4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing source. [5] Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation.
Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 199 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 10.11 shows an example of synchronous operation. In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to 2, TGRB_0 compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source. Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOC0A, TIOC1A, and TIOC2A. At this time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match, are performed for channel 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_0 is used as the PWM cycle. For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes.
Synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match TCNT_0 to TCNT_2 values TGRB_0 TGRB_1 TGRA_0 TGRB_2 TGRA_1 TGRA_2 H'0000 Time
TIOCA_0 TIOCA_1 TIOCA_2
Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 200 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.3
Buffer Operation
Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer registers. Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture register or as a compare match register. Table 10.28 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation. Table 10.28
Channel 0
Register Combinations in Buffer Operation
Timer General Register TGRA_0 TGRB_0 Buffer Register TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TGRC_3 TGRD_3
3
TGRA_3 TGRB_3
* When TGR is an output compare register When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is transferred to the timer general register. This operation is illustrated in figure 10.12.
Compare match signal
Buffer register
Timer general register
Comparator
TCNT
Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 201 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
* When TGR is an input capture register When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register. This operation is illustrated in figure 10.13.
Input capture signal
Buffer register
Timer general register
TCNT
Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.14 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure.
Buffer operation
Select TGR function
[1]
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or output compare register by means of TIOR. [2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits BFA and BFB in TMDR. [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count operation.
Set buffer operation
[2]
Start count
[3]

Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 202 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Buffer Operation 1. When TGR is an output compare register Figure 10.15 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0 output at compare match B. As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA. This operation is repeated each time that compare match A occurs. For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes.
TCNT value TGRB_0 H'0200 TGRA_0 H'0000 TGRC_0 H'0200 Transfer TGRA_0 H'0200 H'0450 H'0450 H'0520 Time H'0520
H'0450
TIOCA
Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 203 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. When TGR is an input capture register Figure 10.16 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge. As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon the occurrence of input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC.
TCNT value H'0F07 H'09FB H'0532 H'0000 Time
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0532
H'0F07
H'09FB
TGRC
H'0532
H'0F07
Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 204 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.4
Cascaded Operation
In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit counter. This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock upon overflow/underflow of TCNT_2 (TCNT_5) as set in bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR. Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode. Table 10.29 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation. Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid and the counters operates independently in phase counting mode. Table 10.29
Combination Channels 1 and 2 Channels 4 and 5
Cascaded Combinations
Upper 16 Bits TCNT_1 TCNT_4 Lower 16 Bits TCNT_2 TCNT_5
Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.17 shows an example of the setting procedure for cascaded operation.
Cascaded operation
Set cascading
[1]
[1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1 (channel 4) TCR to B'1111 to select TCNT_2 (TCNT_5) overflow/underflow counting. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower channel to 1 to start the count operation.
Start count
[2]

Figure 10.17 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 205 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 10.18 illustrates the operation when TCNT_2 overflow/underflow counting has been set for TCNT_1, when TGRA_1 and TGRA_2 have been designated as input capture registers, and when TIOC pin rising edge has been selected. When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of the 32-bit data are transferred to TGRA_1, and the lower 16 bits to TGRA_2.
TCNT_1 clock TCNT_1 TCNT_2 clock TCNT_2 TIOCA1, TIOCA2 TGRA_1 H'03A2 H'FFFF H'0000 H'0001 H'03A1 H'03A2
TGRA_2
H'0000
Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1) Figure 10.19 illustrates the operation when TCNT_2 overflow/underflow counting has been set for TCNT_1 and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2. TCNT_1 is incremented by TCNT_2 overflow and decremented by TCNT_2 underflow.
TCLKA
TCLKB TCNT_2 FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0001 0000 FFFF
TCNT_1
0000
0001
0000
Figure 10.19 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 206 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.5
PWM Modes
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. The output level can be selected as 0, 1, or toggle output in response to a compare match of each TGR. TGR registers settings can be used to output a PWM waveform in the range of 0% to 100% duty. Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is also possible. There are two PWM modes, as described below. * PWM mode 1 PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA0 to IOA3 and IOC0 to IOC3 in TIOR is output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output specified by bits IOB0 to IOB3 and IOD0 to IOD3 in TIOR is output at compare matches B and D. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible. * PWM mode 2 PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers. The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 2, a maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible in combination use with synchronous operation. The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 10.30.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 207 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.30
PWM Output Registers and Output Pins
Output Pins
Channel 0
Registers TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0
PWM Mode 1 TIOCA0
PWM Mode 2 TIOCA0 TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCC0 TIOCD0
1
TGRA_1 TGRB_1
TIOCA1
TIOCA1 TIOCB1
2
TGRA_2 TGRB_2
TIOCA2
TIOCA2 TIOCB2
3
TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3
TIOCA3
TIOCA3 TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCC3 TIOCD3
4
TGR4A_4 TGR4B_4
TIOCA4
TIOCA4 TIOCB4
5
TGRA_5 TGRB_5
TIOCA5
TIOCA5 TIOCB5
Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is set.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 208 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.20 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure.
PWM mode
Select counter clock
[1]
Select counter clearing source
[2]
Select waveform output level
[3]
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source. [3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output compare register, and select the initial value and output value. [4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set the duty in the other the TGR. [5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. [6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count operation.
Set TGR
[4]
Set PWM mode
[5]
Start count
[6]

Figure 10.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 10.21 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation. In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value. In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in the TGRB registers are used as the duty levels.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 209 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCNT value TGRA
Counter cleared by TGRA compare match
TGRB H'0000 Time
TIOCA
Figure 10.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) Figure 10.22 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation. In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGRB_1 compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other TGR registers (TGRA_0 to TGRD_0, TGRA_1), outputting a 5-phase PWM waveform. In this case, the value set in TGRB_1 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs are used as the duty levels.
Counter cleared by TGRB_1 compare match
TCNT value TGRB_1 TGRA_1 TGRD_0 TGRC_0 TGRB_0 TGRA_0 H'0000
Time TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
Figure 10.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 210 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.23 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM mode.
TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA
TGRB H'0000
TGRB rewritten
TGRB rewritten Time
TIOCA
0% duty
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 100% duty TGRB rewritten Time
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten
TGRB H'0000 100% duty 0% duty
TGRB rewritten Time
TIOCA
Figure 10.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 211 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.6
Phase Counting Mode
In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 and bits CKEG0 and CKEG1 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR0 and CCLR1 in TCR, and of TIOR, TIER, and TGR, are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be used. This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input. If overflow occurs when TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; if underflow occurs when TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set. The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag reveals whether TCNT is counting up or down. Table 10.31 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels. Table 10.31 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins
External Clock Pins Channels When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode A-Phase TCLKA TCLKC B-Phase TCLKB TCLKD
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 212 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.24 shows an example of the phase counting mode setting procedure.
Phase counting mode
[1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. [1]
Select phase counting mode
Start count
[2]

Figure 10.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes, according to the count conditions. 1. Phase counting mode 1 Figure 10.25 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 10.32 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 213 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.32
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Up-count
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level
Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge Down-count
2. Phase counting mode 2 Figure 10.26 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 10.33 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count
Time
Figure 10.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 214 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.33
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Don't care
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level
Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge Down-count Up-count Don't care
3. Phase counting mode 3 Figure 10.27 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 10.34 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 215 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.34
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Don't care
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level
Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge Up-count Down-count Don't care
4. Phase counting mode 4 Figure 10.28 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 10.35 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 216 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.35
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Up-count
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level
Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge
Don't care
Down-count
Don't care
Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 10.29 shows an example in which channel 1 is in phase counting mode, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect position or speed. Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input to TCLKA and TCLKB. Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGRC_0 compare match; TGRA_0 and TGRC_0 are used for the compare match function and are set with the speed control period and position control period. TGRB_0 is used for input capture, with TGRB_0 and TGRD_0 operating in buffer mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGRB_0 input capture source, and the pulse widths of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses are detected. TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 for channel 1 are designated for input capture, and channel 0 TGRA_0 and TGRC_0 compare matches are selected as the input capture source and store the up/down-counter values for the control periods. This procedure enables the accurate detection of position and speed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 217 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel 1 TCLKA TCLKB Edge detection circuit TCNT_1
TGRA_1 (speed period capture) TGRB_1 (speed period capture)
TCNT_0
+ - + -
TGRA_0 (speed control period) TGRC_0 (position control period)
TGRB_0 (pulse width capture)
TGRD_0 (buffer operation) Channel 0
Figure 10.29 Phase Counting Mode Application Example
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 218 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.5
Interrupts
There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source; TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled bit, allowing the generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually. When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0. Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, however the priority order within a channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 10.36 lists the TPU interrupt sources.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 219 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.36
Channel 0
TPU Interrupts
Interrupt Source TGRA_0 input capture/compare match TGRB_0 input capture/compare match TGRC_0 input capture/compare match TGRD_0 input capture/compare match TCNT_0 overflow TGRA_1 input capture/compare match TGRB_1 input capture/compare match TCNT_1 overflow TCNT_1 underflow TGRA_2 input capture/compare match TGRB_2 input capture/compare match TCNT_2 overflow TCNT_2 underflow TGRA_3 input capture/compare match TGRB_3 input capture/compare match TGRC_3 input capture/compare match TGRD_3 input capture/compare match TCNT_3 overflow TGRA_4 input capture/compare match TGRB_4 input capture/compare match TCNT_4 overflow TCNT_4 underflow TGRA_5 input capture/compare match TGRB_5 input capture/compare match TCNT_5 overflow TCNT_5 underflow DTC Interrupt Flag Activation TGFA_0 TGFB_0 TGFC_0 TGFD_0 TCFV_0 TGFA_1 TGFB_1 TCFV_1 TCFU_1 TGFA_2 TGFB_2 TCFV_2 TCFU_2 TGFA_3 TGFB_3 TGFC_3 TGFD_3 TCFV_3 TGFA_4 TGFB_4 TCFV_4 TCFU_4 TGFA_5 TGFB_5 TCFV_5 TCFU_5 Possible Possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible
Name TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0 TCIV_0
1
TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TCIV_1 TCIU_1
2
TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TCIV_2 TCIU_2
3
TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3 TGID_3 TCIV_3
4
TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TCIV_4 TCIU_4
5
TGIA_5 TGIB_5 TCIV_5 TCIU_5
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 220 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The TPU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for each channel. Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.6
DTC Activation
The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.7
A/D Converter Activation
The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel. If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to begin A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at this time, A/D conversion is begun. In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D converter conversion start sources, one for each channel.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 221 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.8
10.8.1
Operation Timing
Input/Output Timing
TCNT Count Timing: Figure 10.30 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 10.31 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation.
Internal clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 N+2
Figure 10.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation
External clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 N+2
Figure 10.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 222 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output compare output pin. After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not generated until the TCNT input clock is generated. Figure 10.32 shows output compare output timing.
TCNT input clock N N+1
TCNT
TGR
N
Compare match signal TIOC pin
Figure 10.32 Output Compare Output Timing Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 10.33 shows input capture signal timing.
Input capture input Input capture signal
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
TGR
N
N+2
Figure 10.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 223 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 10.34 shows the timing when counter clearing on compare match is specified, and figure 10.35 shows the timing when counter clearing on input capture is specified.
Compare match signal Counter clear signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
TGR
N
Figure 10.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)
Input capture signal
Counter clear signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
TGR
N
Figure 10.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 224 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 10.36 and 10.37 show the timing in buffer operation.
TCNT
n
n+1
Compare match signal TGRA, TGRB TGRC, TGRD
n
N
N
Figure 10.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
Input capture signal
TCNT
N
N+1
TGRA, TGRB TGRC, TGRD
n
N
N+1
n
N
Figure 10.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 225 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.8.2
Interrupt Signal Timing
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 10.38 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR on compare match, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
N+1
TGR
N
Compare match signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 226 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 10.39 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR on input capture, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.
Input capture signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 227 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 10.40 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV flag in TSR on overflow, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing. Figure 10.41 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR on underflow, and TCIU interrupt request signal timing.
TCNT input clock TCNT (overflow) Overflow signal
H'FFFF
H'0000
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 10.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
TCNT input clock TCNT (underflow) Underflow signal
H'0000
H'FFFF
TCFU flag
TCIU interrupt
Figure 10.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 228 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. When the DTC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 10.42 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 10.43 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the DTC.
TSR write cycle T2 T1
Address
TSR address
Write signal
Status flag
Interrupt request signal
Figure 10.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU
DTC read cycle T1 T2 DTC write cycle T1 T2
Address
Source address
Destination address
Status flag
Interrupt request signal
Figure 10.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC Activation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 229 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9
10.9.1
Usage Notes
Module Stop Mode Setting
TPU operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for TPU operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes. 10.9.2 Input Clock Restrictions
The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not operate properly at narrower pulse widths. In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 10.44 shows the input clock conditions in phase counting mode.
Phase Phase differdifferOverlap ence ence
Overlap TCLKA (TCLKC) TCLKB (TCLKD)
Pulse width
Pulse width
Pulse width
Pulse width
Notes: Phase difference and overlap : 1.5 states or more Pulse width : 2.5 states or more
Figure 10.44 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 230 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.3
Caution on Period Setting
When counter clearing on compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula: f= Where (N + 1) f : Counter frequency : Operating frequency N : TGR set value
10.9.4
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
If the counter clear signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT write is not performed. Figure 10.45 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle T2 T1
Address
TCNT address
Write signal Counter clear signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 10.45 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 231 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.5
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 10.46 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle T2 T1
Address
TCNT address
Write signal TCNT input clock N TCNT write data M
TCNT
Figure 10.46 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 232 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.6
Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence and the compare match signal is inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the previous value is written. Figure 10.47 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle T2 T1
Address
TGR address
Write signal Compare match signal TCNT N N+1
Prohibited
TGR
N TGR write data
M
Figure 10.47 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 233 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.7
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data that is transferred to TGR by the buffer operation will be that in the buffer prior to the write. Figure 10.48 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle T1 T2 Address Buffer register address
Write signal Compare match signal Buffer register write data Buffer register TGR N M
N
Figure 10.48 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 234 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.8
Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be that in the buffer after input capture transfer. Figure 10.49 shows the timing in this case.
TGR read cycle T1 T2 Address TGR address
Read signal Input capture signal TGR X M
Internal data bus
M
Figure 10.49 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 235 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.9
Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to TGR is not performed. Figure 10.50 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle T1 T2 Address TGR address
Write signal Input capture signal TCNT M
TGR
M
Figure 10.50 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 236 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.10 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a buffer register write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed. Figure 10.51 shows the timing in this case.
Buffer register write cycle T1 T2 Address Buffer register address
Write signal Input capture signal TCNT N
TGR Buffer register
M
N
M
Figure 10.51 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 237 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.11 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence. Figure 10.52 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing source, and when H'FFFF is set in TGR.
TCNT input clock TCNT Counter clear signal TGF Prohibited TCFV H'FFFF H'0000
Figure 10.52 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 238 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.12 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow If there is an up-count or down-count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set. Figure 10.53 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and overflow.
TCNT write cycle T2 T1
Address
TCNT address
Write signal
TCNT write data H'FFFF Prohibited M
TCNT
TCFV flag
Figure 10.53 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow 10.9.13 Multiplexing of I/O Pins In this LSI, the TCLKA input pin is multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O pin, the TCLKB input pin with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O pin, and the TCLKD input pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin. When an external clock is input, compare match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin. 10.9.14 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 239 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 240 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
The programmable pulse generator provides pulse outputs using the 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) as a time base. The PPG pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 2 and group 3) that can operate both simultaneously and independently. The block diagram of the PPG is shown in figure 11.1.
11.1
* * * * * * *
Features
8-bit output data Two output groups Selectable output trigger signals Non-overlap mode Can operate in tandem with the data transfer controller (DTC) Settable inverted output Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 241 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Compare match signals
NDERH Control logic PMR
NDERL PCR
PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8
Pulse output pins, group 3 PODRH Pulse output pins, group 2 Pulse output pins, group 1 PODRL Pulse output pins, group 0 NDRL NDRH
Internal data bus
[Legend] PMR: PCR: NDERH: NDERL: NDRH: NDRL: PODRH: PODRL:
PPG output mode register PPG output control register Next data enable register H Next data enable register L Next data register H Next data register L Output data register H Output data register L
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of PPG
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 242 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 11.1 summarizes the I/O pins of the PPG. Table 11.1 PPG I/O Pins
Pin Name PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 I/O Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Group 2 pulse output Function Group 3 pulse output
11.3
Register Descriptions
The PPG has the following registers. * * * * * * * * PPG output control register (PCR) PPG output mode register (PMR) Next data enable register H (NDERH) Next data enable register L (NDERL) Output data register H (PODRH) Output data register L (PODRL) Next data register H (NDRH) Next data register L (NDRL)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 243 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.1
Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL)
NDERH and NDERL are an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis. The corresponding DDR also needs to be set to 1 in order to enable pulse output by the PPG. NDERH
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Enable 8 to 15 When a bit is set to 1 for pulse output by NDRH, the value in the corresponding NDRH bit is transferred to the PODRH bit by the selected output trigger. Values are not transferred from NDRH to PODRH for cleared bits.
NDERL
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDER7 NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER2 NDER1 NDER0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Enable 0 to 7 When a bit is set to 1 for pulse output by NDRL, the value in the corresponding NDRL bit is transferred to the PODRL bit by the selected output trigger. Values are not transferred from NDRL to PODRL for cleared bits.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 244 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.2
Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL)
PODRH and PODRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store output data for use in pulse output. A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only and cannot be modified. PODRH
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name POD15 POD14 POD13 POD12 POD11 POD10 POD9 POD8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output Data Register 8 to 15 For bits that have been set to pulse output by NDERH, the output trigger transfers NDRH values to this register during PPG operation. While NDERH is set to 1, the CPU cannot write to this register. While NDERH is cleared, the initial output value of the pulse can be set.
PODRL
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name POD15 POD14 POD13 POD12 POD11 POD10 POD9 POD8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output Data Register 0 to 7 For bits which have been set to pulse output by NDERL, the output trigger transfers NDRL values to this register during PPG operation. While NDERL is set to 1, the CPU cannot write to this register. While NDERL is cleared, the initial output value of the pulse can be set.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 245 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.3
Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL)
NDRH and NDRL are an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the data for the next pulse output. The NDR addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output trigger or different output triggers. NDRH If pulse output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Register 8 to 15 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger specified with PCR.
If pulse output groups 2 and output pulse groups 3 have different output triggers, the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are mapped to different addresses, as shown below.
Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 All 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -- Description Next Data Register 12 to 15 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
3 to 0 --
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 246 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value All 1
R/W --
Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
7 to 4 --
3 2 1 0
NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8
0 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
Next Data Register 8 to11 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger specified with PCR.
NDRL If pulse output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Register 0 to 7 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger specified with PCR.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 247 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
If pulse output groups 0 and output pulse groups 1 have different output triggers, upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits are mapped to the different addresses as shown below.
Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 All 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -- Description Next Data Register 4 to 7 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
3 to 0 --
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value All 1
R/W --
Description Reserved 1 is always read and write is disabled.
7 to 4 --
3 2 1 0
NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0
0 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
Next Data Register 3 to 0 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger specified with PCR.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 248 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.4
PPG Output Control Register (PCR)
PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals on a group-by-group basis. For details on output trigger selection, refer to section 11.3.5, PPG Output Mode Register (PMR).
Bit 7 6 Bit Name G3CMS1 G3CMS0 Initial Value 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Description Group 3 Compare Match Select 0 and 1 Select output trigger of pulse output group 3. 00: Compare match in TPU channel 0 01: Compare match in TPU channel 1 10: Compare match in TPU channel 2 11: Compare match in TPU channel 3 5 4 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 1 1 R/W R/W Group 2 Compare Match Select 0 and 1 Select output trigger of pulse output group 2. 00: Compare match in TPC channel 0 01: Compare match in TPC channel 1 10: Compare match in TPC channel 2 11: Compare match in TPC channel 3 3 2 1 0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W Reserved Reserved
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 249 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.5
PPG Output Mode Register (PMR)
The PMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the pulse output mode of the PPG for each group. If inverted output is selected, a low-level pulse is output when PODRH is 1 and a high-level pulse is output when PODRH is 0. If non-overlapping operation is selected, PPG updates its output values on compare match A or B of the TPU that becomes the output trigger. For details, refer to section 11.4.5, Non-Overlapping Pulse Output.
Bit 7 Bit Name G3INV Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Group 3 Inversion Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 3. 0: Inverted output 1: Direct output 6 G2INV 1 R/W Group 2 Inversion Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 2. 0: Inverted output 1: Direct output 5, 4 3 -- G3NOV All 1 0 R/W R/W Reserved Group 3 Non-Overlap Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 3. 0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) 1: Non-overlapping operation (output values at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) 2 G2NOV 0 R/W Group 2 Non-Overlap Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 2. 0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) 1: Non-overlapping operation (output values at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) 1, 0 -- All 0 R/W Reserved
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 250 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4
11.4.1
Operation
Overview
Figure 11.2 shows a block diagram of the PPG. PPG pulse output is enabled when the corresponding bits in P1DDR and NDER are set to 1. An initial output value is determined by its corresponding PODR initial setting. When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the corresponding NDR bit contents are transferred to PODR to update the output values. The sequential output of up to 8 bits of data is possible by writing new output data to NDR before the next compare match.
DDR
NDER Q Output trigger signal
C Q PODR D Pulse output pin Normal output/inverted output
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Figure 11.2 PPG Output Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 251 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.2
Output Timing
If pulse output is enabled, the contents of NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when the specified compare match event occurs. Figure 11.3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A.
TCNT
N
N+1
TGRA
N
Compare match A signal
NDRH
n
PODRH
m
n
PO8 to PO15
m
n
Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 252 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.3
Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output
Figure 11.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal pulse output.
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA an output compare register (with output disabled). [2] Set the PPG output trigger period.
Set TGRA value TPU setup Set counting operation Select interrupt request Set initial output data Enable pulse output Port and PPG setup Select output trigger Set next pulse output data TPU setup Start counter Compare match? Yes Set next pulse output data [10] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [2]
Normal PPG output Select TGR functions [1]
[3] Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. [4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The DTC can also be set up to transfer data to NDR. [5] Set the initial output values in PODR. [6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the pins to be used for pulse output to 1. [7] Select the TPU compare match event to be used as the output trigger in PCR. [8] Set the next pulse output values in NDR. [9] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter. [10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next output values in NDR.
[8]
[9] No
Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 253 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.4
Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output)
Figure 11.5 shows an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output.
TCNT value TGRA Compare match
TCNT
H'0000 NDRH 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 40
Time
PODRH
00
80
C0
40
60
20
30
10
18
08
88
80
C0
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) 1. Set up TGRA of the TPU that is used as the output trigger to be an output compare register. Set a frequency in TGRA so the counter will be cleared on compare match A. Set the TGIEA bit of TIER to 1 to enable the compare match/input capture A (TGIA) interrupt. 2. Write H'F8 in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS0, G3CMS1, G2CMS0, and G2CMS1 bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger. Write output data H'80 in NDRH. 3. When compare match A occurs, the NDRH contents are transferred to PODRH and output. The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRH. 4. Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained subsequently by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30. H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88, ... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 254 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.5
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
During non-overlapping operation, transfer from NDR to PODR is performed as follows: * NDR bits are always transferred on PODR bits on compare match A. * On compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred if their value is 1. Figure 11.6 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation.
DDR
NDER Q Compare match A Compare match B
Pulse output pin
C Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before compare match A. The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval between compare match B and compare match A (the non-overlap margin). This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC. Note, however, that the next data must be written before the next compare match B occurs.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 255 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Figure 11.7 shows the timing of this operation.
Compare match A
Compare match B Write to NDR NDR Write to NDR
PODR 0 output 0/1 output 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR here
Write to NDR Do not write here to NDR here
Do not write to NDR here
Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 256 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.6
Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Figure 11.8 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output.
Non-overlapping PPG output Select TGR functions Set TGR values TPU setup Set counting operation Select interrupt request Set initial output data Enable pulse output Select output trigger Set non-overlapping groups Set next pulse output data TPU setup Start counter Compare match A? Yes Set next pulse output data [11] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [1] [2]
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA and TGRB an output compare registers (with output disabled). [2] Set the pulse output trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in TGRA. [3] Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. [4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The DTC can also be set up to transfer data to NDR. [5] Set the initial output values in PODR. [6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the pins to be used for pulse output to 1. [7] Select the TPU compare match event to be used as the pulse output trigger in PCR. [8] In PMR, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. [9] Set the next pulse output values in NDR. [10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter. [11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next output values in NDR.
PPG setup
[9]
[10] No
Figure 11.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 257 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.7
Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Output)
Figure 11.9 shows an example in which pulse output is used for four-phase complementary nonoverlapping pulse output.
TCNT value TGRB TCNT TGRA H'0000 NDRH 95 65 59 56 95 65 Time
PODRH
00
95
05
65
41
59
50
56
14
95
05
65
Non-overlap margin PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 258 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
1. Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel such that TGRA and TGRB are output compare registers. Set the trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in TGRA, and set the counter to be cleared on compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the TGIA interrupt. 2. Write H'FF in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger. Set the G3NOV and G2NOV bits in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping output. Write output data H'95 in NDRH. 3. The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs, outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA). The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRH. 4. Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by writing H'59, H'56, H'95, ... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 259 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.8
Inverted Pulse Output
If the G3INV, G2INV, G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the inverse of the PODR contents can be output. Figure 11.10 shows the outputs when G3INV and G2INV are cleared to 0, in addition to the settings of figure 11.9.
TCNT value TGRB TCNT TGRA H'0000 NDRH 95 65 59 56 95 65 Time
PODRL
00
95
05
65
41
59
50
56
14
95
05
65
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 11.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 260 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.9
Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture
Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be triggered by the input capture signal. Figure 11.11 shows the timing of this output.
TIOC pin Input capture signal
NDR
N
PODR
M
N
PO
M
N
Figure 11.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)
11.5
11.5.1
Usage Notes
Module Stop Mode Setting
PPG operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for PPG operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes. 11.5.2 Operation of Pulse Output Pins
Pins PO8 to PO15 are also used for other peripheral functions such as the TPU. When output by another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for pulse output. Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits takes place, regardless of the usage of the pins. Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 261 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 262 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer (WDT) is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. The block diagram of the WDT is shown in figure 12.1.
12.1
Features
* Selectable from eight counter input clocks. * Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode. In watchdog timer mode * If the counter overflows, it is possible to select whether this LSI is internally reset or not. In interval timer mode * If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 263 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Overflow WOVI (interrupt request signal) Interrupt control Clock Clock select
Internal reset signal*
Reset control
/2 /64 /128 /512 /2048 /8192 /32768 /131072 Internal clock sources
Internal bus
RSTCSR
TCNT
TSCR Bus interface
Module bus WDT [Legend] Timer control/status register TCSR: Timer counter TCNT: RSTCSR: Reset control/status register Note: * The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting.
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of WDT
12.2
Register Descriptions
The WDT has the following three registers. To prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR, TCNT, and RSTCSR have to be written to by a different method to normal registers. For details, refer to section 12.5.1, Notes on Register Access. * Timer control/status register (TCSR) * Timer counter (TCNT) * Reset control/status register (RSTCSR) 12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, when the TME bit in TCSR is cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 264 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to TCNT, and selecting the timer mode.
Bit 7 Bit Name OVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Overflow Flag Indicates that TCNT has overflowed. Only a write of 0 is permitted, to clear the flag. [Setting condition] * When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset. [Clearing condition] * 6 WT/IT 0 R/W Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF
Timer Mode Select Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. 0: Interval timer mode 1: Watchdog timer mode
5
TME
0
R/W
Timer Enable When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting. When this bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and is initialized to H'00.
4, 3
--
All 1
--
Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 265 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Bit 2 1 0
Bit Name CKS2 CKS1 CKS0
Initial Value 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
Description Clock Select 0 to 2 Selects the clock source to be input to TCNT. The overflow frequency for = 20 MHz is enclosed in parentheses. 000: Clock /2 (frequency: 25.6 s) 001: Clock /64 (frequency: 819.2 s) 010: Clock /128 (frequency: 1.6 ms) 011: Clock /512 (frequency: 6.6 ms) 100: Clock /2048 (frequency: 26.2 ms) 101: Clock /8192 (frequency: 104.9 ms) 110: Clock /32768 (frequency: 419.4 ms) 111: Clock /131072 (frequency: 1.68 s)
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 266 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.3
Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the generation of the internal reset signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. RSTCSR is initialized to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin, and not by the WDT internal reset signal caused by overflows.
Bit 7 Bit Name WOVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Watchdog Overflow Flag This bit is set when TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode. This bit cannot be set in interval timer mode, and only 0 can be written. [Setting condition] * Set when TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to H'00) in watchdog timer mode Cleared by reading RSTCSR when WOVF = 1, and then writing 0 to WOVF
[Clearing condition] * 6 RSTE 0 R/W
Reset Enable Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated in the chip if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. 0: Reset signal is not generated even if TCNT overflows (Though this LSI is not reset, TCNT and TCSR in WDT are reset) 1: Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows
5
RSTS
0
R/W
Reset Select Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. 0: Power-on reset 1: Setting prohibited
4 to 0 --
All 1
--
Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 267 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.3
12.3.1
Operation
Watchdog Timer Mode
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT bit in TCSR and the TME bit to 1. When the WDT is used as a watchdog timer, and if TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system malfunction or other error, an internal reset occurs and the internal chip states can be reset. TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally be writing H'00) before overflows occurs. In this case, select power-on reset by setting the RSTS bit of the RSTCSR to 0. The internal reset signal is output for 518 states. If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a WDT overflow, the RES pin reset has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0. The WDTOVF signal is output for 132 states when the RSTE bit = 1 of RSTCSR, and for 130 states when the RSTE bit = 0. When the TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the WOVF bit of the RSTCSR is set to 1. If the RSTE bit of the RSTCSR has been set to 1, an internal reset signal for the entire LSI is generated at TCNT overflow. 12.3.2 Interval Timer Mode
When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time the TCNT overflows. Therefore, an interrupt can be generated at intervals. When the TCNT overflows in interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested at the time the OVF bit of the TCSR is set to 1.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 268 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.4
Interrupts
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. Table 12.1 WDT Interrupt Source
Name WOVI Interrupt Source TCNT overflow Interrupt Flag WOVF DTC Activation Impossible
12.5
12.5.1
Usage Notes
Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer's TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to by a byte transfer instruction. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. Therefore, the relative condition shown in figure 12.2 needs to be satisfied in order to write to TCNT or TCSR. The transfer instruction writes the lower byte data to TCNT or TCSR according to the satisfied condition. To write to RSTCSR, execute a word transfer instruction for address H'FF76. A byte transfer instruction cannot write to RSTCSR. The method of writing 0 to the WOVF bit differs from that of writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits. To write 0 to the WOVF bit, satisfy the condition shown in figure 12.2. If satisfied, the transfer instruction clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE and RSTS bits. To write to the RSTE and RSTS bits, satisfy the condition shown in figure 12.2. If satisfied, the transfer instruction writes the values in bits 5 and 6 of the lower byte into the RSTE and RSTS bits, respectively, but has no effect on the WOVF bit.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 269 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
TCNT write Writing to RSTE and RSTS bits Address: H'FF74 H'FF76 15 H'5A 8 7 Write data 0
TCSR write Writing 0 to WOVF bit Address: H'FF74 H'FF76 15 H'A5 8 7 0 Write data or H'00
Figure 12.2 Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (Example for WDT0) Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (WDT0) These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FF74 for TCSR, H'FF75 for TCNT, and H'FF77 for RSTCSR.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 270 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.5.2
Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 12.3 shows this operation.
TCNT write cycle T1 T2
Address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 12.3 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment 12.5.3 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0
If bits CKS0 to CKS2 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must be used to stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of bits CKS0 to CKS2. 12.5.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must be used to stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 271 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.5.5
Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode
This LSI is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during watchdog timer operation, however TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are reset. TCNT, TCSR, or RSTCR cannot be written to for 132 states following an overflow. During this period, any attempt to read the WOVF flag is not acknowledged. Accordingly, wait 132 states after overflow to write 0 to the WOVF flag for clearing. 12.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Intervel Timer Mode
When the OVF flag setting conflicts with the OVF flag reading in interval timer mode, writing 0 to the OVF bit may not clear the flag even though the OVF bit has been read while it is 1. If there is a possibility that the OVF flag setting and reading will conflict, such as when the OVF flag is polled with the intervel timer interrupt disabled, read the OVF bit while it is 1 at least twice before writing 0 to the OVF bit to clear the flag.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 272 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
This LSI has three independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Serial data communication can be carried out using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). The SCI also supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as a serial communication interface extension function. Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
13.1
Features
* Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode * Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously. Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data. * On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected External clock can be selected as a transfer clock source (except for in Smart Card interface mode). * Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data) * Four interrupt sources Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive error -- that can issue requests. The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can be used to activate the data transfer controller (DTC). * Module stop mode can be set Asynchronous mode: * * * * Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 273 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
* Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in the case of a framing error Clocked Synchronous mode: * Data length: 8 bits * Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected Smart Card interface: * Automatic transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode * Error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode * Direct convention and inverse convention both supported
Bus interface
Module data bus
Internal data bus
RDR
TDR
SCMR SSR SCR
BRR Baud rate generator /4 /16 /64 Clock
RxD
RSR
TSR
SMR
Transmission/ reception control
TxD
Parity generation Parity check
SCK
External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI
[Legend] RSR: Receive shift register RDR: Receive data register TSR: Transmit shift register TDR: Transmit data register SMR: Serial mode register SCR: Serial control register SSR: Serial status register SCMR: Smart card mode register BRR: Bit rate register
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 274 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 13.1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel. Table 13.1 Pin Configuration
Channel 0 Pin Name* SCK0 RxD0 TxD0 1 SCK1 RxD1 TxD1 2 SCK2 RxD2 TxD2 Note: * I/O I/O Input Output I/O Input Output I/O Input Output Function SCI0 clock input/output SCI0 receive data input SCI0 transmit data output SCI1 clock input/output SCI1 receive data input SCI1 transmit data output SCI2 clock input/output SCI2 receive data input SCI2 transmit data output
Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel designation.
13.3
Register Descriptions
The SCI has the following registers for each channel. Note that the serial mode register (SMR), serial status register (SSR), and serial control register (SCR) are described separately for normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode because their bit functions differ in part. * * * * * * * * * Receive shift register (RSR) Receive data register (RDR) Transmit data register (TDR) Transmit shift register (TSR) Serial mode register (SMR) Serial control register (SCR) Serial status register (SSR) Smart card mode register (SCMR) Bit rate register (BRR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 275 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input to the RxD pin and convert it into parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 13.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. 13.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has already been written to TDR during serial transmission, the SCI transfers the written data to TSR to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times, to achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. 13.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 276 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR is used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. Some bit functions of SMR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode. Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)
Bit 7 Bit Name C/A Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Communication Mode 0: Asynchronous mode 1: Clocked synchronous mode 6 CHR 0 R/W Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects 8 bits as the data length. 1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is fixed and the MSB of TDR is not transmitted in transmission. In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used. 5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. For a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition and checking are not performed regardless of the PE bit setting. 4 O/E 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. 3 STOP 0 R/W Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) Selects the stop bit length in transmission. 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits In reception, only the first stop bit is checked. If the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 277 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 2
Bit Name MP
Initial Value 0
R/W R/W
Description Multiprocessor Mode (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The PE bit and O/E bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode.
1 0
CKS1 CKS0
0 0
R/W R/W
Clock Select 0 and 1 These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. 00: clock (n = 0) 01: /4 clock (n = 1) 10: /16 clock (n = 2) 11: /64 clock (n = 3) For the relationship between the bit rate register setting and the baud rate, see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n in BRR (see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 278 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)
Bit 7 Bit Name GM Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description GSM Mode When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in GSM mode. In GSM mode, the timing of the TEND setting is advanced by 11.0 etu (Elementary Time Unit: the time for transfer of 1 bit), and clock output control mode addition is performed. For details, refer to section 13.7.8, Clock Output Control. 6 BLK 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in block transfer mode. For details on block transfer mode, refer to section 13.7.3, Block Transfer Mode. Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data in transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. In Smart Card interface mode, this bit must be set to 1. 4 O/E 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. For details on setting this bit in Smart Card interface mode, refer to section 13.7.2, Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode). 3 2 BCP1 BCP0 0 0 R/W R/W Basic Clock Pulse 1 and 2 These bits specify the number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval on the Smart Card interface. 00: 32 clock (S = 32) 01: 64 clock (S = 64) 10: 372 clock (S = 372) 11: 256 clock (S = 256) For details, refer to section 13.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode. S stands for the value of S in BRR (see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
5
PE
0
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 279 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 1 0
Bit Name CKS1 CKS0
Initial Value 0 0
R/W R/W R/W
Description Clock Select 0 and 1 These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. 00: clock (n = 0) 01: /4 clock (n = 1) 10: /16 clock (n = 2) 11: /64 clock (n = 3) For the relationship between the bit rate register setting and the baud rate, see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n in BRR (see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 280 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.6
Serial Control Register (SCR)
SCR is a register that enables or disables SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is also used to selection of the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 13.8, Interrupts. Some bit functions of SCR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode. Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)
Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request is enabled. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. 5 4 3 TE RE MPIE 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Transmit Enable When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled. Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is prohibited. On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is resumed. For details, refer to section 13.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. 2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable This bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is enabled.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 281 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 1 0
Bit Name CKE1 CKE0
Initial Value 0 0
R/W R/W R/W
Description Clock Enable 0 and 1 Selects the clock source and SCK pin function. Asynchronous mode 00: Internal clock SCK pin functions as I/O port 01: Internal clock Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate from the SCK pin. 1X: External clock Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate from the SCK pin. Clocked synchronous mode 0X: Internal clock (SCK pin functions as clock output) 1X: External clock (SCK pin functions as clock input)
[Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 282 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)
Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, TXI interrupt request is enabled. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. 5 4 3 TE RE MPIE 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Transmit Enable When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode. 2 1 0 TEIE CKE1 CKE0 0 0 0 R/W R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode. Clock Enable 0 and 1 Enables or disables clock output from the SCK pin. The clock output can be dynamically switched in GSM mode. For details, refer to section 13.7.8, Clock Output Control. When the GM bit in SMR is 0: 00: Output disabled (SCK pin can be used as an I/O port pin) 01: Clock output 1X: Reserved When the GM bit in SMR is 1: 00: Output fixed low 01: Clock output 10: Output fixed high 11: Clock output [Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 283 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. Some bit functions of SSR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode. Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)
Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Transmit Data Register Empty Displays whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR
[Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt request and writes data to TDR
6
RDRF
0
R/W
Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] * When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and transferred data from RDR
The RDRF flag is not affected and retains their previous values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 284 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 5
Bit Name ORER
Initial Value 0
R/W R/W
Description Overrun Error [Setting condition] * When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition] * 4 FER 0 R/W When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1
Framing Error [Setting condition] * When the stop bit is 0
[Clearing condition] * When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1
In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked. 3 PER 0 R/W Parity Error [Setting condition] * When a parity error is detected during reception
[Clearing condition] * When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 285 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 2
Bit Name TEND
Initial Value 1
R/W R
Description Transmit End [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character
[Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR
1
MPB
0
R
Multiprocessor Bit MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 its previous state is retained.
0
MPBT
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 286 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)
Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Transmit Data Register Empty Displays whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR
[Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt request and writes data to TDR
6
RDRF
0
R/W
Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] * When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and transferred data from RDR
The RDRF flag is not affected and retains their previous values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 287 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 5
Bit Name ORER
Initial Value 0
R/W R/W
Description Overrun Error [Setting condition] * When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition] * 4 ERS 0 R/W When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1
Error Signal Status [Setting condition] * When the low level of the error signal is sampled
[Clearing condition] * 3 PER 0 R/W When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1
Parity Error [Setting condition] * When a parity error is detected during reception
[Clearing condition] * When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 288 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 2
Bit Name TEND
Initial Value 1
R/W R
Description Transmit End This bit is set to 1 when no error signal has been sent back from the receiving end and the next transmit data is ready to be transferred to TDR. [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit is also 0 When the ERS bit is 0 and the TDRE bit is 1 after the specified interval following transmission of 1byte data. The timing of bit setting differs according to the register setting as follows: When GM = 0 and BLK = 0, 2.5 etu after transmission starts When GM = 0 and BLK = 1, 1.5 etu after transmission starts When GM = 1 and BLK = 0, 1.0 etu after transmission starts When GM = 1 and BLK = 1, 1.0 etu after transmission starts [Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR
1 0
MPB MPBT
0 0
R R/W
Multiprocessor Bit This bit is not used in Smart Card interface mode. Multiprocessor Bit Transfer Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 289 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.8
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
SCMR is a register that selects Smart Card interface mode and its format.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 1 0 R/W -- R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. 3 SDIR Smart Card Data Transfer Direction Selects the serial/parallel conversion format. 0: LSB-first in transfer 1: MSB-first in transfer The bit setting is valid only when the transfer data format is 8 bits. For 7-bit data, LSB-first is fixed. 2 SINV 0 R/W Smart Card Data Invert Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. To invert the parity bit, invert the O/E bit in SMR. 0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are. Receive data is stored as it is in RDR 1: TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted. Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR 1 0 -- SMIF 1 0 -- R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1. Smart Card Interface Mode Select This bit is set to 1 to make the SCI operate in Smart Card interface mode. 0: Normal asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode 1: Smart card interface mode
7 to 4 --
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 290 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.9
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 13.2 shows the relationships between the N setting in BRR and bit rate B for normal asynchronous mode, clocked synchronous mode, and Smart Card interface mode. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and it can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. Table 13.2 Relationships between the N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B
Mode Asynchronous Mode Clocked Synchronous Mode Smart Card Interface Mode Bit Rate
B= x 106 64 x 2 2n-1 x (N + 1) x 106 8 x 2 2n-1 x (N + 1) x 106 S x 2 2n+1 x (N + 1) Error (%) = { x 106 B x S x 2 2n+1 x (N + 1) - 1 } x 100
Error
Error (%) = { x 106 B x 64 x 2 2n-1 x (N + 1) - 1 } x 100
--
B=
B=
Notes: B: Bit rate (bit/s) N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 N 255) : Operating frequency (MHz) n and S: Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following tables. SMR Setting CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 n 0 1 2 3 BCP1 0 0 1 1 SMR Setting BCP0 0 1 0 1 S 32 64 372 256
Table 13.3 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 13.4 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in normal asynchronous mode. Table 13.6 shows sample N settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode. Table 13.8 shows sample N settings in BRR in Smart Card interface mode. In Smart Card interface mode, S (the number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval) can be selected. For details, refer to section 13.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode. Tables 13.5 and 13.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 291 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 4 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 -- N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 -- 3 -- Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -- 0.00 -- n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 86 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 4 3 4.9152 Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 1.73 0.00 1.73
Operating Frequency (MHz) 6 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 5 4 Error (%) -0.44 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6.144 N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 9 5 4 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 7.3728 N 130 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 -- 5 Error (%) -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 -- 8 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 --
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 292 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Operating Frequency (MHz) 9.8304 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 Error (%) -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 10 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 0.00 1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 212 155 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 11 9 12 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 12.288 N 217 159 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 11 9 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00
Operating Frequency (MHz) 14 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 248 181 90 181 90 181 90 45 22 13 -- Error (%) -0.17 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 -0.93 -0.93 0.00 -- n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.7456 N 64 191 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 14 11 Error (%) 0.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 15 12 16 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 17.2032 N 75 223 111 223 111 223 111 55 27 13 13 Error (%) 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.20 0.00
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 293 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Operating Frequency (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 18 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 79 233 116 233 116 233 116 58 28 17 14 Error (%) -0.12 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -0.69 1.02 0.00 -2.34 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 86 255 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 19 15 19.6608 Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 19 15 20 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 0.00 1.73
Table 13.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
(MHz) 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 250000 307200 312500 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (MHz) 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 375000 384000 437500 460800 500000 537600 562500 614400 625000 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 294 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
(MHz) 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 External Input Clock (MHz) 1.0000 1.2288 1.2500 1.5000 1.5360 1.8432 2.0000 2.4576 2.5000 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 62500 76800 78125 93750 96000 115200 125000 153600 156250 (MHz) 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 External Input Clock (MHz) 3.0000 3.0720 3.5000 3.6864 4.0000 4.3008 4.5000 4.9152 5.0000 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 187500 192000 218750 230400 250000 268800 281250 307200 312500
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 295 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5k 5k 10k 25k 50k 100k 250k 500k 1M 2.5M 5M [Legend] Blank: Cannot be set. --: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. 4 n -- 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0 0* -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 249 124 249 99 199 99 159 79 39 15 7 3 -- -- 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n 8 N n 10 N n 16 N n 20 N
Table 13.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
(MHz) 4 6 8 10 12 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 2.0000 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 666666.7 1.000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 2000000.0 (MHz) 14 16 18 20 External Input Clock (MHz) 2.3333 2.6667 3.0000 3.3333 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 2333333.3 2666666.7 3000000.0 3333333.3
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 296 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.8 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode) (When n = 0 and S = 372)
Operating Frequency (MHz) 7.1424 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 n 0 N 0 Error (%) 0.00 n 0 10.00 N 1 Error (%) 30 n 0 10.7136 N 1 Error (%) 25 n 0 13.00 N 1 Error (%) 8.99
Operating Frequency (MHz) 14.2848 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 n 0 N 1 Error (%) 0.00 n 0 16.00 N 1 Error (%) 12.01 n 0 18.00 N 2 Error (%) 15.99 n 0 20.00 N 2 Error (%) 6.60
Table 13.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (When S = 372)
(MHz) 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 13441 14400 17473 n 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 (MHz) 14.2848 16.00 18.00 20.00 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 19200 21505 24194 26882 n 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 297 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Figure 13.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line. When the transmission line goes to the space state (low level), the SCI recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication, the communication line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the communication line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
Idle state (mark state) 1 0/1 Parity bit 1 bit, or none 1 1
1 Serial data 0 Start bit 1 bit
LSB D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
MSB D7
Stop bit
Transmit/receive data 7 or 8 bit
1 or 2 bit
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) 13.4.1 Data Transfer Format
Table 13.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor bit, refer to section 13.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 298 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR Settings CHR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 PE 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- -- -- -- MP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 STOP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 S S S S S S S S S S S S 2 Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STOP
11
12
8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data
STOP
STOP STOP
P STOP
P STOP STOP
STOP STOP
P
STOP
P
STOP STOP
MPB STOP
MPB STOP STOP
MPB STOP
MPB STOP STOP
[Legend] S: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 299 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4.2
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 13.3. Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.
M = { (0.5 - D - 0.5 1 )- N 2N - (L - 0.5) F} x 100 [%]
... Formula (1)
Where M N D L F
: Reception margin : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) : Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0) : Frame length (L = 9 to 12) : Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty) = 0.5 in formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula. M = {0.5 - 1/(2 x 16)} x 100 [%] = 46.875% However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in system design.
16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal basic clock Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing 7 15 0 7 15 0
Start bit
D0
D1
Figure 13.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 300 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4.3
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 13.4.
SCK TxD 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1
1 frame
Figure 13.4 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 301 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4.4
SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, or transfer format, is changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. When the clock is selected in asynchronous mode, it is output immediately after SCR settings are made. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used.
[4]
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR Wait
[2]
[3]
No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits

Figure 13.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 302 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4.5
Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 13.6 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed. 3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. 5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the "mark state" is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. Figure 13.7 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.
Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1
1
1 Idle state (mark state)
TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR and TXI interrupt request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in request generated TXI interrupt service routine
TEI interrupt request generated
1 frame
Figure 13.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 303 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start transmission
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set DDR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0.
No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR
No TEND = 1 Yes No Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1
[4]
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
Figure 13.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 304 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4.6
Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 13.8 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI performs internal synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit. 2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1), the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.
Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 0
1
1 Idle state (mark state)
RDRF FER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt service routine
ERI interrupt request generated by framing error
1 frame
Figure 13.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 305 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.11 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 13.9 shows a sample flowchart for serial data reception. Table 13.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling
SSR Status Flag RDRF* 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Lost Transferred to RDR Transferred to RDR Lost Lost Transferred to RDR Lost Receive Error Type Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error
The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 306 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start reception
[1]
[1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing and break detection: Read ORER, PER, and [2] If a receive error occurs, read the FER flags in SSR ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the Yes appropriate error processing, ensure PER FER ORER = 1 that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are [3] all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be No Error processing resumed if any of these flags are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a (Continued on next page) break can be detected by reading the value of the input port corresponding to [4] Read RDRF flag in SSR the RxD pin.
No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
[4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and the RDR value is read.
No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5]
Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 307 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[3] Error processing
No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing
No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error processing Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
No PER = 1 Yes Parity error processing
Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0

Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 308 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.5
Multiprocessor Communication Function
Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 13.10 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1, transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags, RDRF, FER, and ORER to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1 and the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated. When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 309 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmitting station Serial transmission line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data Receiving station B (ID = 02) H'01 (MPB = 1) Receiving station C (ID = 03) H'AA (MPB = 0) Receiving station D (ID = 04)
ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle = receiving station Data transmission to specification receiving station specified by ID Legend: MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 13.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) 13.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 13.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 310 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start transmission
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set the port DDR to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0.
No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR
Clear TDRE flag to 0
No All data transmitted? Yes [3]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No TEND = 1 Yes No Break output? Yes [4]
Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0

Figure 13.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 311 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.5.2
Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figure 13.13 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure 13.12 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.
Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (ID1) MPB D7 1 Stop bit 1 Start bit 0 D0 Data (Data1) D1 D7 Stop MPB bit 0
1
1
1 Idle state (mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR value MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt service routine
ID1 If not this station's ID, MPIE bit is set to 1 again RXI interrupt request is not generated, and RDR retains its state
(a) Data does not match station's ID
1
Start bit 0 D0 D1
Data (ID2) D7
Stop MPB bit 1 1
Start bit 0 D0
Data (Data2) D1 D7
Stop MPB bit 0
1
1 Idle state (mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR value
ID1 MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt service routine
ID2 Matches this station's ID, so reception continues, and data is received in RXI interrupt service routine
Data2 MPIE bit set to 1 again
(b) Data matches station's ID
Figure 13.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 312 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start reception
[1]
[1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1. [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station's ID. If the data is not this station's ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station's ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. [4] SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. [5] Receive error processing and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error processing, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin [4] value.
Read MPIE bit in SCR Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
[2]
FER ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No This station's ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
[3]
FER ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR
Yes
No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 (Continued on next page)
[5] Error processing
Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 313 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[5]
Error processing
No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing
No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error processing Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Clear ORER and FER flags in SSR to 0

Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 314 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.6
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Figure 13.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. In clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronous with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication through the use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * Synchronization clock LSB Serial data Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transfer Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Bit 7 Don't care *
Figure 13.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) 13.6.1 Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 315 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.6.2
SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, the TE and RE bits in SCR should be cleared to 0, then the SCI should be initialized as described in a sample flowchart in figure 13.15. When the operating mode, or transfer format, is changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
Start initialization
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and RE, to 0. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR.
[1]
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0)
[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used.
Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR Wait
[2]
[3]
No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes
Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits
[4]

Note:
In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 13.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 316 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.6.3
Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 13.16 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode. In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed. 3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock has been specified. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7). 5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high. Figure 13.17 shows a sample flow chart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1. Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 317 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transfer direction Synchronization clock Serial data TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt service routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7
Figure 13.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 318 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start transmission
[1]
[1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR.
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No All data transmitted? Yes [3]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No TEND = 1 Yes Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
Figure 13.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 319 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.6.4
Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 13.18 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronous clock input or output, starts receiving data, and stores the received data in RSR. 2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag in SSR is still set to 1), the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished.
Synchronization clock Serial data RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt service routine 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7
Figure 13.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 13.19 shows a sample flow chart for serial data reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 320 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start reception
[1]
[1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [3] Receive error processing: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0 should be finished. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read.
Read ORER flag in SSR
[2]
Yes ORER = 1 No [3] Error processing (Continued below) Read RDRF flag in SSR [4]
No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5]
[3]
Error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0
Figure 13.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 321 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.6.5
Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 13.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (ORER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 322 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization Start transmission/reception
[1]
[1]
SCI initialization: The TxD pin is designated as the transmit data output pin, and the RxD pin is designated as the receive data input pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and receive operations. SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. Receive error processing: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. Serial transmission/reception continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible. Then write data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read.
Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
[2]
[2]
[3]
Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [3] Error processing
ORER = 1 No
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
[4]
[5]
No All data received? Yes [5]
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 323 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.7
Operation in Smart Card Interface
The SCI supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface that conforms to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as a serial communication interface extension function. Switching between the normal serial communication interface and the Smart Card interface mode is carried out by means of a register setting. 13.7.1 Pin Connection Example
Figure 13.21 shows an example of connection with the Smart Card. In communication with an IC card, as both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the TxD pin and RxD pin should be connected to the LSI pin. The data transmission line should be pulled up to the VCC power supply with a resistor. If an IC card is not connected, and the TE and RE bits are both set to 1, closed transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried out. When the clock generated on the Smart Card interface is used by an IC card, the SCK pin output is input to the CLK pin of the IC card. This LSI port output is used as the reset signal.
VCC TxD RxD SCK Rx (port) This LSI Connected equipment Data line Clock line Reset line I/O CLK RST IC card
Figure 13.21 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 324 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.7.2
Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode)
Figure 13.22 shows the transfer data format in Smart Card interface mode. * One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit in asynchronous mode. * In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary Time Unit: the time for transfer of 1 bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. * If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu period, 10.5 etu after the start bit. * If an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted automatically after a delay of 2 etu or longer.
When there is no parity error Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
Transmitting station output
When a parity error occurs Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Transmitting station output Receiving station output Start bit Data bits Parity bit Error signal
[Legend] DS: D0 to D7: Dp: DE:
Figure 13.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format Data transfer with other types of IC cards (direct convention and inverse convention) are performed as described in the following.
(Z) A Ds Z D0 Z D1 A D2 Z D3 Z D4 Z D5 A D6 A D7 Z Dp (Z) state
Figure 13.23 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 325 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
With the direction convention type IC and the above sample start character, the logic 1 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3B. For the direct convention type, clear the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR to 0. According to Smart Card regulations, clear the O/E bit in SMR to 0 to select even parity mode.
(Z) A Ds Z D7 Z D6 A D5 A D4 A D3 A D2 A D1 A D0 Z Dp (Z) state
Figure 13.24 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1) With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level to state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The start character data for the above is H'3F. For the inverse convention type, set the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR to 1. According to Smart Card regulations, even parity mode is the logic 0 level of the parity bit, and corresponds to state Z. In this LSI, the SINV bit inverts only data bits D0 to D7. Therefore, set the O/E bit in SMR to 1 to invert the parity bit for both transmission and reception. 13.7.3 Block Transfer Mode
Operation in block transfer mode is the same as that in SCI asynchronous mode, except for the following points. * In reception, though the parity check is performed, no error signal is output even if an error is detected. However, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and must be cleared before receiving the parity bit of the next frame. * In transmission, a guard time of at least 1 etu is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. * In transmission, because retransmission is not performed, the TEND flag is set to 1, 11.5 etu after transmission start. * As with the normal Smart Card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal status, but since error signal transfer is not performed, this flag is always cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 326 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.7.4
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode
In Smart Card interface mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 32, 64, 372, or 256 times the transfer rate (fixed at 16 times in normal asynchronous mode) as determined by bits BCP1 and BCP0. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. As shown in figure 13.25, by sampling receive data at the rising-edge of the 16th, 32nd, 186th, or 128th pulse of the basic clock, data can be latched at the middle of the bit. The reception margin is given by the following formula.
M = | (0.5 - | D - 0.5 | 1 ) - (L - 0.5) F - (1 + F) | x 100% N 2N
Where M: Reception margin (%) N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256) D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) L: Frame length (L = 10) F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5 and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin formula is as follows. M = (0.5 - 1/2 x 372) x 100% = 49.866%
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 327 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
372 clocks 186 clocks 0 Internal basic clock 185 371 0 185 371 0
Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing
Start bit
D0
D1
Data sampling timing
Figure 13.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode (Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate) 13.7.5 Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below. Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa. 1. 2. 3. 4. Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0. Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0. Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP0, BCP1, CKS0, CKS1 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1. Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR. When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD and RxD pins are both switched from ports to SCI pins, and are placed in the high-impedance state. 5. Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR. 6. Set the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0. If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin. 7. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 328 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
To switch from receive mode to transmit mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception, initialize the SCI, and set RE to 0 and TE to 1. Whether SCI has finished reception or not can be checked with the RDRF, PER, or ORER flags. To switch from transmit mode to receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission, initialize the SCI, and set TE to 0 and RE to 1. Whether SCI has finished transmission or not can be checked with the TEND flag. 13.7.6 Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode)
As data transmission in Smart Card interface mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the operations are different from those in normal serial communication interface mode (except for block transfer mode). Figure 13.26 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in transmit mode. 1. If an error signal is sent back from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is complete, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled. 2. The TEND bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error signal indicating an abnormality is received. Data is retransferred from TDR to TSR, and retransmitted automatically. 3. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set. Transmission of one frame, including a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated. Writing transmit data to TDR transfers the next transmit data. Figure 13.28 shows a flowchart for transmission. The sequence of transmit operations can be performed automatically by specifying the DTC to be activated with a TXI interrupt source. In a transmit operation, the TDRE flag is set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR is set, and a TXI interrupt will be generated if the TIE bit in SCR has been set to 1. If the TXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the TXI request, and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0 when data is transferred by the DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DTC is not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared. When performing transfer using the DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC before carrying out SCI setting. For details of the DTC setting procedures, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 329 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
nth transfer frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE TDRE Transfer to TSR from TDR TEND [7] FER/ERS [6]
Retransferred frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp (DE)
Transfer frame n+1 Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
Transfer to TSR from TDR
Transfer to TSR from TDR
[9]
[8]
Figure 13.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND flag set timing is shown in figure 13.27.
I/O data TXI (TEND interrupt) When GM = 0
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
DE Guard time
12.5 etu
11.0 etu When GM = 1
[Legend] Ds: D0 to D7: Dp: DE:
Start bit Data bits Parity bit Error signal
Note: etu: Elementary Time Unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Figure 13.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 330 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Start
Initialization Start transmission
ERS = 0? Yes
No
Error processing No TEND = 1? Yes Write data to TDR, and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No All data transmitted ? Yes No ERS = 0? Yes Error processing No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit to 0
End
Figure 13.28 Example of Transmission Processing Flow
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 331 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.7.7
Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode)
Data reception in Smart Card interface mode uses the same operation procedure as for normal serial communication interface mode. Figure 13.29 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in receive mode. 1. If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. The PER bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled. 2. The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred. 3. If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1, the receive operation is judged to have been completed normally, and the RDRF flag in SSR is automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Figure 13.30 shows a flowchart for reception. A sequence of receive operations can be performed automatically by specifying the DTC to be activated using an RXI interrupt source. In a receive operation, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the RXI request, and the receive data will be transferred. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data is transferred by the DTC. If an error occurs in receive mode and the ORER or PER flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (ERI) request will be generated. Hence, so the error flag must be cleared to 0. In the event of an error, the DTC is not activated and receive data is skipped. Therefore, receive data is transferred for only the specified number of bytes in the event of an error. Even when a parity error occurs in receive mode and the PER flag is set to 1, the data that has been received is transferred to RDR and can be read from there. Note: For details on receive operations in block transfer mode, refer to section 13.4, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
Transfer frame n + 1 (DE) Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
nth transfer frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE RDRF [2] PER [1]
Retransferred frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
[4]
[3]
Figure 13.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 332 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Start
Initialization
Start reception
ORER = 0 and PER = 0 Yes
No
Error processing No
RDRF = 1? Yes
Read RDR and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received? Yes Clear RE bit to 0
Figure 13.30 Example of Reception Processing Flow
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 333 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.7.8
Clock Output Control
When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be fixed with bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be made the specified width. Figure 13.31 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, GM is set to 1, CKE1 is cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled.
CKE0
SCK
Specified pulse width
Specified pulse width
Figure 13.31 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level When turning on the power or switching between Smart Card interface mode and software standby mode, the following procedures should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty. Powering On: To secure clock duty from power-on, the following switching procedure should be followed. 1. The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use a pull-up resistor or pull-down resistor to fix the potential. 2. Fix the SCK pin to the specified output level with the CKE1 bit in SCR. 3. Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card mode operation. 4. Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output. When changing from smart card interface mode to software standby mode: 1. Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK pin to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 2. Write 0 to the TE bit and RE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to halt transmit/receive operation. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 3. Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to halt the clock. 4. Wait for one serial clock period. During this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty preserved. 5. Make the transition to the software standby state.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 334 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
When returning to smart card interface mode from software standby mode: 1. Exit the software standby state. 2. Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR and output the clock. Signal generation is started with the normal duty.
Software standby
Normal operation
Normal operation
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
[6] [7]
Figure 13.32 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure
13.8
13.8.1
Interrupts
Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode
Table 13.12 shows the interrupt sources in normal serial communication interface mode. A different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR. When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data is transferred by the DTC. When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt request can activate the DTC to transfer data. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data is transferred by the DTC. A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 and the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for acceptance. However, if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared simultaneously by the TXI interrupt routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt routine later.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 335 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Channel 0 Name ERI_0 RXI_0 TXI_0 TEI_0 1 ERI_1 RXI_1 TXI_1 TEI_1 2 ERI_2 RXI_2 TXI_2 TEI_2 Interrupt Source Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Interrupt Flag ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible
13.8.2
Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode
Table 13.13 shows the interrupt sources in Smart Card interface mode. The transmit end interrupt (TEI) request cannot be used in this mode. Table 13.13 SCI Interrupt Sources
Channel 0 Name ERI_0 RXI_0 TXI_0 1 ERI_1 RXI_1 TXI_1 2 ERI_2 RXI_2 TXI_2 Interrupt Source Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Interrupt Flag ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 336 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In Smart Card interface mode, as in normal serial communication interface mode, transfer can be carried out using the DTC. In transmit operations, the TDRE flag is also set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR is set, and a TXI interrupt is generated. If the TXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the TXI request, and transmit data will be transferred. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0 when data is transferred by the DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DTC is not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs. Hence, the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared. When transferring using the DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC before carrying out SCI setting. For details of the DTC setting procedures, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). In receive operations, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the RXI request, and the receive data will be transferred. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data is transferred by the DTC. If an error occurs, an error flag is set but the RDRF flag is not. Consequently, the DTC is not activated, instead, an ERI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Therefore, the error flag should be cleared.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 337 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.9
13.9.1
Usage Notes
Module Stop Mode Setting
SCI operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for SCI operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes. 13.9.2 Break Detection and Processing
When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, setting the FER flag, and possibly the PER flag. Note that as the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. 13.9.3 Mark State and Break Detection
When TE is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state (high level) or send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state until TE is set to 1, set both PCR and PDR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission, first set PCR to 1 and PDR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin. 13.9.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 338 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.9.5
Restrictions on Using DTC
When the external clock source is used as a synchronization clock, update TDR by the DTC and wait for at least five clock cycles before allowing the transmit clock to be input. If the transmit clock is input within four clock cycles after TDR modification, the SCI may malfunction (figure 13.33). When using the DTC to read RDR, be sure to set the receive end interrupt source (RXI) as a DTC activation source.
SCK
t
TDRE LSB
Serial data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Note: When external clock is supplied, t must be more than four clock cycles.
Figure 13.33 Sample Transmission using DTC in Clocked Synchronous Mode 13.9.6 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions
Transmission: Before making the transition to module stop, software standby, watch, sub-active, or sub-sleep mode, stop all transmit operations (TE = TIE = TEIE = 0). TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The states of the output pins during each mode depend on the port settings, and the pins output a high-level signal after mode is cancelled and then the TE is set to 1 again. If the transition is made during data transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. To transmit data in the same transmission mode after mode cancellation, set TE to 1, read SSR, write to TDR, clear TDRE in this order, and then start transmission. To transmit data in a different transmission mode, initialize the SCI first. Figure 13.34 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Figures 14.35 and 14.36 show the pin states during transmission. Before making the transition from the transmission mode using DTC transfer to module stop, software standby, watch, sub-active, or sub-sleep mode, stop all transmit operations (TE = TIE = TEIE = 0). Setting TE and TIE to 1 after mode cancellation generates a TXI interrupt request to start transmission using the DTC.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 339 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmission
All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR
No
[1]
TEND = 1 Yes TE = 0 [2]
No
[1] Data being transmitted is lost halfway. Data can be normally transmitted from the CPU by setting TE to 1, reading SSR, writing to TDR, and clearing TDRE to 0 after mode cancellation; however, if the DTC has been initiated, the data remaining in DTC RAM will be transmitted when TE and TIE are set to 1. [2] Also clear TIE and TEIE to 0 when they are 1.
Make transition to software standby mode etc. Cancel software standby mode etc.
[3]
[3] Module stop, watch, sub-active, and sub-sleep modes are included.
Change operating mode? Yes Initialization
No
TE = 1
Start transmission
Figure 13.34 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission
Transition to Software standby software standby mode cancelled mode
Transmission start
Transmission end
TE bit SCK output pin TxD output pin
Port input/output Port input/output
High output
Start SCI TxD output
Stop
Port input/output Port
High output SCI TxD output
Port
Figure 13.35 Pin States during Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Internal Clock)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 340 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmission start
Transmission end
Transition to Software standby software standby mode cancelled mode
TE bit SCK output pin TxD output pin
Port input/output Port input/output
Marking output SCI TxD output
Last TxD bit retained
Port input/output Port
Port
High output* SCI TxD output
Note: * Initialized in software standby mode
Figure 13.36 Pin States during Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode (Internal Clock) Reception: Before making the transition to module stop, software standby, watch, sub-active, or sub-sleep mode, stop reception (RE = 0). RSR, RDR, and SSR are reset. If transition is made during data reception, the data being received will be invalid. To receive data in the same reception mode after mode cancellation, set RE to 1, and then start reception. To receive data in a different reception mode, initialize the SCI first. Figure 13.37 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 341 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Reception
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR
No
[1]
[1] Data being received will be invalid.
RE = 0 [2]
[2] Module stop, watch, sub-active, and subsleep modes are included.
Make transition to software standby mode etc. Cancel software standby mode etc.
Change operating mode? Yes Initialization
No
RE = 1
Start reception
Figure 13.37 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 342 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.9.7
Notes when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin
* Problem in Operation: When DDR and DR are set to 1, SCI clock output is used in clocked synchronous mode, and the SCK pin is changed to the port pin while transmission is ended, port output is enabled after low-level output occurs for one half-cycle. When switching the SCK pin to the port pin by making the following settings while DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, low-level output occurs for one halfcycle. 1. End of serial data transmission 2. TE bit = 0 3. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output 4. Occurrence of low-level output (see figure 13.38)
Half-cycle low-level output SCK/port 1. End of transmission Data TE C/A CKE1 CKE0 Bit 6 Bit 7 2. TE = 0 4. Low-level output
3. C/A = 0
Figure 13.38 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 343 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
* Usage Note: To prevent low-level output occurred when switching the SCK pin to port pin, follow the procedure described below. As this sample procedure temporarily places the SCK pin in the input state, the SCK/port pin should be pulled up beforehand with an external circuit. With DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, make the following settings in the order shown. 1. End of serial data transmission 2. TE bit = 0 3. CKE1 bit = 1 4. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output 5. CKE1 bit = 0
High-level output SCK/port 1. End of transmission Data TE C/A 3. CKE1 = 1 CKE1 CKE0 5. CKE1 = 0 Bit 6 Bit 7 2. TE = 0
4. C/A = 0
Figure 13.39 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin (Example of Preventing Low-Level Output)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 344 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Section 14 A/D Converter
This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to twelve analog input channels to be selected. The Block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure 14.1.
14.1
* * * *
Features
* * *
* *
10-bit resolution Twelve input channels Conversion time: 13.3 s per channel (at 20-MHz operation) Two operating modes Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels Four data registers Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel Sample and hold function Three methods conversion start Software 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) conversion start trigger External trigger signal Interrupt request An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 345 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Module data bus
Internal data bus
AVCC 10-bit D/A AVSS
Successive approximations register
ADDRC
ADDRD
ADDRB
ADDRA
ADCSR
AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN8 AN9 AN10 AN11
ADCR
Bus interface
+ - /2 /4 Control circuit /8 /16 ADI interrupt Conversion start trigger from TPU
Comparator
Multiplexer
Sample-andhold circuit
ADTRG [Legend] ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD:
A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 346 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 14.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The 12 analog input pins are divided into four channel sets and three groups; analog input pins 0 to 3 (AN0 to AN3) comprising group 0, analog input pins 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7) comprising group 1, and analog input pins 8 to 11 (AN8 to AN11) comprising group 2. The AVcc and AVss pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter. Table 14.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 Analog input pin 8 Analog input pin 9 Analog input pin 10 Analog input pin 11 A/D external trigger input pin Symbol AVCC AVSS AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN8 AN9 AN10 AN11 ADTRG I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input External trigger input pin for starting A/D conversion Group 2 analog input pins Group 1 analog input pins Function Analog block power supply and reference voltage Analog block ground and reference voltage Group 0 analog input pins
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 347 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.3
Register Description
The A/D converter has the following registers. * * * * * * A/D data register A (ADDRA) A/D data register B (ADDRB) A/D data register C (ADDRC) A/D data register D (ADDRD) A/D control/status register (ADCSR) A/D control register (ADCR) A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
14.3.1
There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers; ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each channel, are shown in table 14.2. The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 6 to 15. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0. The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits wide. The upper byte can be read directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read. When reading the ADDR, read the upper byte before the lower byte, or read in word unit. When only the lower byte is read, the contents are not guaranteed. Table 14.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers
Analog Input Channel CH3 = 0 Group 0 (CH2 = 0) AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 (CH2 = 1) AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Group 2 (CH2 = 0) AN8 AN9 AN10 AN11 CH3 = 1 -- (CH2 = 1) Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited A/D Data Register to Be Stored the Results of A/D Conversion ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 348 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.3.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
ADCSR controls A/D conversion operations.
Bit 7 Bit Name ADF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W) Description A/D End Flag A status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. [Setting conditions] * * When A/D conversion ends When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels
[Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1 When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read
6
ADIE
0
R/W
A/D Interrupt Enable A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled when 1 is set
5
ADST
0
R/W
A/D Start Clearing this bit to 0 stops A/D conversion, and the A/D converter enters the wait state. Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. In single mode, this bits is cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel is complete. In scan mode, conversion continues sequentially on the specified channels until this bit is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to software standby mode, hardware standby mode or module stop mode.
4
SCAN
0
R/W
Scan Mode Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating mode. 0: Single mode 1: Scan mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 349 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Bit 3 2 1 0
Bit Name CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Description Channel Select 0 to 3 Select analog input channels. When SCAN = 0 0000: AN0 0001: AN1 0010: AN2 0011: AN3 0100: AN4 0101: AN5 0110: AN6 0111: AN7 1000: AN8 1001: AN9 1010: AN10 1011: AN11 1100: Setting prohibited 1101: Setting prohibited 1110: Setting prohibited 1111: Setting prohibited When SCAN = 1 0000: AN0 0001: AN0 and AN1 0010: AN0 to AN2 0011: AN0 to AN3 0100: AN4 0101: AN4 and AN5 0110: AN4 to AN6 0111: AN4 to AN7 1000: AN8 1001: AN8 and AN9 1010: AN8 to AN10 1011: AN8 to AN11 1100: Setting prohibited 1101: Setting prohibited 1110: Setting prohibited 1111: Setting prohibited
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 350 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.3.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
The ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal.
Bit 7 6 Bit Name TRGS1 TRGS0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Timer Trigger Select 0 and 1 Enables the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. Only set bits TRGS0 and TRGS1 while conversion is stopped (ADST = 0). 00: A/D conversion start by software is enabled 01: A/D conversion start by TPU conversion start trigger is enabled 10: Setting prohibited 11: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) is enabled 5, 4 3 2 -- CKS1 CKS0 All 1 0 0 -- R/W R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Clock Select 0 and 1 These bits specify the A/D conversion time. The conversion time should be changed only when ADST = 0. Specify a setting that gives a value within the range shown in table 20.7. 00: Conversion time = 530 states (max.) 01: Conversion time = 266 states (max.) 10: Conversion time = 134 states (max.) 11: Conversion time = 68 states (max.) 1, 0 -- All 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 1.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 351 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes; single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the bit ADST to 0 in ADCSR. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed. 14.4.1 Single Mode
In single mode, A/D conversion is to be performed only once on the specified single channel. The operations are as follows. 1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1, according to software or external trigger input. 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the corresponding A/D data register to the channel. 3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. 4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D converion ends, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state. 14.4.2 Scan Mode
In scan mode, A/D conversion is to be performed sequentially on the specified channels (four channels maximum). The operations are as follows. 1. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, TPU or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH3 and CH2 = 00, AN4 when CH3 and CH2 = 01, or AN8 when CH3 and CH2 = 10). 2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to the A/D data register corresponding to each channel. 3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends. Conversion of the first channel in the group starts again. 4. Steps 2 to 3 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops and the A/D converter enters the wait state.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 352 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 14.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 14.3 shows the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 14.2, the A/D conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and the input sampling time (tSPL). The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 14.3. In scan mode, the values given in table 14.3 apply to the first conversion time. The values given in table 14.4 apply to the second and subsequent conversions. In both cases, set bits CKS1 and CKS0 in ADCR to give an A/D conversion time within the range shown in table 20.7.
(1) Address (2)
Write signal Input sampling timing
ADF tD tSPL tCONV [Legend] (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address A/D conversion start delay tD: tSPL: Input sampling time tCONV: A/D conversion time
Figure 14.2 A/D Conversion Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 353 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Table 14.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS1 = 0 CKS0 = 0 Item CKS0 = 1 CKS1 = 1 CKS0 = 0 CKS0 = 1 Min. Typ. Max. 4 -- 67 -- 15 -- 5 -- 68
Symbol Min. Typ. Max. Min. Typ. Max. Min. Typ. Max. 18 -- -- 33 10 -- -- 63 17 -- 266 6 -- -- 31 9 -- 134
A/D conversion tD start delay Input sampling time tSPL
127 -- 530
A/D conversion tCONV time
515 --
259 --
131 --
Note: All values represent the number of states.
Table 14.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode)
CKS1 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 Conversion Time (State) 512 (Fixed) 256 (Fixed) 128 (Fixed) 64 (Fixed)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 354 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS0 and TRGS1 bits are set to 11 in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the bit ADST has been set to 1 by software. Figure 14.3 shows the timing.
ADTRG
Internal trigger signal
ADST A/D conversion
Figure 14.3 External Trigger Input Timing
14.5
Interrupts
The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. Setting the ADIE bit to 1 enables ADI interrupt requests while the bit ADF in ADCSR is set to 1 after A/D conversion is completed. The DTC can be activated by an ADI interrupt. Having the converted data read by the DTC in response to an ADI interrupt enables continuous conversion without imposing a load on software. Table 14.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Source
Name ADI Interrupt Source A/D conversion completed Interrupt Source Flag ADF DTC Activation Possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 355 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.6
A/D Conversion Precision Definitions
This LSI's A/D conversion precision definitions are given below. * Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes * Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 14.4). * Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'00) to B'0000000001 (H'01) (see figure 14.5). * Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3E) to B'1111111111 (H'3F) (see figure 14.5). * Nonlinearity error The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between zero voltage and fullscale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error (see figure 14.5). * Absolute precision The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, fullscale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 356 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Digital output
111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000
Ideal A/D conversion characteristic
Quantization error
1 2 1024 1024
1022 1023 FS 1024 1024 Analog input voltage
Figure 14.4 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions
Full-scale error
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion characteristic
Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Analog input voltage
Offset error
Figure 14.5 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 357 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.7
14.7.1
Usage Notes
Module Stop Mode Setting
Operation of the A/D converter can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for operation of the A/D converter to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 18, Power-Down Modes. 14.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance
This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 5 k or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 k, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee A/D conversion precision. However, for A/D conversion in single mode with a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 k, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/s or greater) (see figure 14.6). When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. 14.7.3 Influences on Absolute Precision
Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as AVss. Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the mounting board (i.e, acting as antennas).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 358 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
This LSI Sensor output impedance to 5 k Sensor input Low-pass filter C to 0.1 F Cin = 15 pF
A/D converter equivalent circuit 10 k 20 pF
Figure 14.6 Example of Analog Input Circuit 14.7.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings
If the conditions below are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected. * Analog input voltage range The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn during A/D conversion should be in the range AVss VAN AVcc. * Relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss Set AVss = Vss as the relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss. If the A/D converter is not used, the AVcc and AVss pins must not be left open. 14.7.5 Notes on Board Design
In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN11), and analog power supply (AVcc) by the analog ground (AVss). Also, the analog ground (AVss) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (Vss) on the board.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 359 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.7.6
Notes on Noise Countermeasures
A protection circuit should be connected in order to prevent damage due to abnormal voltage, such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN11), between AVcc and AVss, as shown in figure 14.7. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVcc and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to AN11 must be connected to AVss. If a filter capacitor is connected, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN11) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (Rin), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding circuit constants.
AVCC Rin*2 *1 0.1 F 100 AN0 to AN11 AVSS
Notes: Values are reference values. 1. 10 F 0.01 F
2. Rin: Input impedance
Figure 14.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 360 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Table 14.6 Analog Pin Specifications
Item Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Min -- -- Max 20 5 Unit pF k
10 k AN0 to AN11 To A/D converter 20 pF
Note: Values are reference values.
Figure 14.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 361 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 14 A/D Converter
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 362 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 15 RAM
Section 15 RAM
This LSI has 4 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data. The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR). For details on the system control register (SYSCR), refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 363 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 15 RAM
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 364 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Section 16 ROM
The features of the flash memory are summarized below. The block diagram of the flash memory is shown in figure 16.1.
16.1
Features
* Size: 128 kbytes * Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block units. The flash memory is configured as follows: 32 kbytes x 2 blocks, 28 kbytes x 1 block, 16 kbytes x 1 block, 8 kbytes x 2 blocks, and 1 kbyte x 4 blocks. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn. * Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. * Three programming modes Boot mode User mode Programmer mode On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed. * Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. * Automatic bit rate adjustment For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. * Programming/erasing protection Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 365 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Internal address bus
Internal data bus (16 bits)
Module bus
FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 RAMER Bus interface/controller Operating mode FWE pin Mode pin
Flash memory (128 kbytes)
[Legend] FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: RAMER:
Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 RAM emulation register
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory
16.2
Mode Transitions
When the mode pins and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, this LSI enters an operating mode as shown in figure 16.2. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. The boot, user program and programmer modes are provided as modes to write and erase the flash memory.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 366 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
The differences between boot mode and user program mode are shown in table 16.1. Figure 16.3 shows the operation flow for boot mode and figure 16.4 shows that for user program mode.
MD1 = 1, MD2 = 1, FWE = 0
Reset state
*1 User mode (on-chip ROM enabled)
RES = 0
RES = 0
MD1 = 1, MD2 = 1, FWE = 1 RES = 0 MD2 = 0, MD1 = 1, FWE = 1 RES = 0
*2
FWE = 1
FWE = 0
Programmer mode
User program mode
*1
Boot mode On-board programming mode
Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 1. RAM emulation possible 2. This LSI transits to programmer mode by using the dedicated PROM programmer.
Figure 16.2 Flash Memory State Transitions Table 16.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode Total erase Block erase Programming control program* Yes No (2) User Program Mode Yes Yes (1) (2) (3)
(1) Erase/erase-verify (2) Program/program-verify (3) Emulation Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 367 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
1. Initial state The old program version or data remains written in the flash memory. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host.
2. Programming control program transfer When boot mode is entered, the boot program in this LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is started and the programming control program in the host is transferred to RAM via SCI communication. The boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area.
Host
Host Programming control program New application program
New application program
This LSI
Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI
This LSI
Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area SCI
Application program (old version)
Application program (old version)
Programming control program
3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks.
Host
4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory.
Host
New application program
This LSI
Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area Flash memory preprogramming erase
Programming control program
This LSI
SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area New application program
Programming control program
SCI
Program execution state
Figure 16.3 Boot Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 368 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
1. Initial state The FWE assessment program that confirms that user program mode has been entered, and the program that will transfer the programming/erase control program from flash memory to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory.
Host Programming/ erase control program New application program
2. Programming/erase control program transfer When user program mode is entered, user software confirms this fact, executes transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM.
Host
New application program
This LSI
Boot program Flash memory
FWE assessment program
This LSI
SCI RAM Boot program Flash memory
FWE assessment program
SCI RAM
Transfer program
Transfer program
Programming/ erase control program
Application program (old version)
Application program (old version)
3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units.
Host
4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks.
Host
New application program
This LSI
Boot program Flash memory
FWE assessment program
This LSI
SCI RAM Boot program Flash memory
FWE assessment program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Programming/ erase control program
SCI RAM
Transfer program
Flash memory erase
New application program
Program execution state
Figure 16.4 User Program Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 369 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.3
Block Configuration
Figure 16.5 shows the block configuration of 128-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The flash memory is divided into 32 kbytes (2 blocks), 28 kbytes (1 block), 16 kbytes (1 block), 8 kbytes (2 blocks), and 1 kbyte (4 blocks). Erasing is performed in these units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address with lower eight bits H'00 or H'80.
EB0 Erase unit 1 kbyte EB1 Erase unit 1 kbyte EB2 Erase unit 1 kbyte EB3 Erase unit 1 kbyte EB4 Erase unit 28 kbytes EB5 Erase unit 16 kbytes EB6 Erase unit 8 kbytes EB7 Erase unit 8 kbytes EB8 Erase unit 32 kbytes EB9 Erase unit 32 kbytes
H'000000 H'000380 H'000400
H'000001 H'000381 H'000401
H'000002 H'000382 H'000402
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00007F H'0003FF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00047F H'0007FF
H'000780 H'000800 H'000B80 H'000C00
H'000781 H'000801 H'000B81 H'000C01
H'000782 H'000802 H'000B82 H'000C02 Programming unit: 128 bytes Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00087F
H'000BFF H'000C7F H'000FFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00107F H'007FFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00807F H'00BFFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00C07F H'00DFFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00E07F
H'000F80 H'001000 H'007F80 H'008000 H'00BF80 H'00C000
H'000F81 H'001001 H'007F81 H'008001 H'00BF81 H'00C001
H'000F82 H'001002 H'007F82 H'008002 H'00BF82 H'00C002
H'00DF80 H'00E000 H'00FF80 H'010000
H'00DF81 H'00E001 H'00FF81 H'010001
H'00DF82 H'00E002 H'00FF82 H'010002 Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00FFFF H'01007F H'017FFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'01807F
H'017F80 H'018000 H'01FF80
H'017F81 H'018001 H'01FF81
H'017F82 H'018002 H'01FF82
H'01FFFF
Figure 16.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 370 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.4
Input/Output Pins
The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 16.2. Table 16.2 Pin Configuration
Pin Name RES FWE MD2 MD1 MD0 TxD2 RxD2 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Flash program/erase protection by hardware Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input
16.5
Register Descriptions
The flash memory has the following registers. * * * * * Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) Erase block register 1 (EBR1) Erase block register 2 (EBR2) RAM emulation register (RAMER) Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
16.5.1
FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 16.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 371 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Bit 7
Bit Name FWE
Initial Value --
R/W R
Description Reflects the input level at the FWE pin. It is cleared to 0 when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and set to 1 when a high level is input. Software Write Enable Bit When this bit is set to 1, flash memory programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all EBR1 and EBR2 bits cannot be set.
6
SWE
0
R/W
5
ESU1
0
R/W
Erase Setup Bit When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup state is cancelled.
4
PSU1
0
R/W
Program Setup Bit When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1.
3
EV1
0
R/W
Erase-Verify When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, eraseverify mode is cancelled.
2
PV1
0
R/W
Program-Verify When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-verify mode is cancelled.
1
E1
0
R/W
Erase When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE1 and ESU1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled.
0
P1
0
R/W
Program When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE1 and PSU1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to program mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 372 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.5.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a read-only register, and should not be written to.
Bit 7 Bit Name FLER Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state. See section 16.9.3, Error Protection, for details. 6 to 0 -- All 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0.
16.5.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1 to be automatically cleared to 0.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When this bit is set to 1, 8 kbytes of EB7 (H'00E000 to H'00FFFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 8 kbytes of EB6 (H'00C000 to H'00DFFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 16 kbytes of EB5 (H'008000 to H'00BFFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of EB4 (H'001000 to H'007FFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB3 (H'000C00 to H'000FFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB2 (H'000800 to H'000BFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB1 (H'000400 to H'0007FF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB0 (H'000000 to H'0003FF) will be erased.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 373 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.5.4
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR2 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 0 0 R/W -- R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. 1 0 EB9 EB8 When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB9 (H'018000 to H'01FFFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB8 (H'010000 to H'017FFF) will be erased.
7 to 2 --
16.5.5
RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)
RAMER specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of RAM when emulating real-time flash memory programming. RAMER settings should be made in user mode or user program mode. To ensure correct operation of the emulation function, the ROM for which RAM emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately after this register has been modified. Normal execution of an access immediately after register modification is not guaranteed.
Bit 7, 6 5, 4 3 Bit Name -- -- RAMS Initial Value All 0 All 0 0 R/W -- R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. RAM Select Specifies selection or non-selection of flash memory emulation in RAM. When RAMS = 1, the flash memory is overlapped with part of RAM, and all flash memory block are program/eraseprotected.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 374 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Bit 2 1 0
Bit Name RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
Initial Value 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
Description Flash Memory Area Selection When the RAMS bit is set to 1, one of the following flash memory areas are selected to overlap the RAM area of H'FFE000 to H'FFE3FF. The areas correspond with 1-kbyte erase blocks. 00X: H'000000 to H'0003FF (EB0) 01X: H'000400 to H'0007FF (EB1) 10X: H'000800 to H'000BFF (EB2) 11X: H'000C00 to H'000FFF (EB3) Note: X: Don't care
16.6
On-Board Programming Modes
There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables onboard programming/erasing, and programmer mode, in which programming/erasing is performed with a PROM programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the MD pin settings and FWE pin setting, as shown in table 16.3. The input level of each pin must be defined four states before the reset ends. When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM via SCI_2. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed. This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return when programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program mode, individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control program prepared by the user. Table 16.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes
MD2 1 0 MD1 1 1 MD0 1 1 FWE 1 1 LSI State after Reset End User Mode Boot Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 375 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.6.1
Boot Mode
Table 16.4 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming control program. 1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the description in section 16.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 2. SCI_2 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, and no parity. 3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI_2 bit rate to match that of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100 states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period. 4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 16.5. 5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'FFE800 to H'FFEFBF is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program. 6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations by SCI_2 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of write data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high. The contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc. 7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, and then setting the mode (MD) pins. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT overflow occurs. 8. Do not change the MD pin input levels in boot mode. 9. All interrupts are disabled during programming or erasing of the flash memory.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 376 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Table 16.4 Boot Mode Operation
Host Operation Processing Contents LSI Operation Processing Contents Branches to boot program at reset-start. Boot program initiation Bit rate adjustment Continuously transmits data H'00 at specified bit rate. H'00, H'00 ...... H'00 . Measures low-level period of receive data H'00. . Calculates bit rate and sets it in BRR of SCI_2. . Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment end indication. Transmits data H'AA to host when data H'55 is received.
Item Boot mode start
Communications Contents
Transmits data H'55 when data H'00 is received error-free.
H'00 H'55 H'AA
Receives data H'AA. Transfer of programming control program Transmits number of bytes (N) of programming control program to be transferred as 2-byte data (low-order byte following high-order byte). Transmits 1-byte of programming control program (repeated for N times). Flash memory erase Boot program erase error Receives data H'AA. H'FF High-order byte and low-order byte Echobacks the 2-byte data received. Echoback H'XX Echoback Echobacks received data to host and also transfers it to RAM (repeated for N times).
H'AA
Checks flash memory data, erases all flash memory blocks in case of written data existing, and transmits data H'AA to host. (If erase could not be done, transmits data H'FF to host and aborts operation.) Branches to programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM and starts execution.
Table 16.5 System Clock Frequencies for Which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate Is Possible
Host Bit Rate 19,200 bps 9,600 bps 4,800 bps System Clock Frequency Range of LSI 20 MHz 8 to 20 MHz 4 to 20 MHz
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 377 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.6.2
Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode
On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot mode. Figure 16.6 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode. Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 16.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 378 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Reset-start
No Program/erase? Yes Transfer user program/erase control program to RAM Branch to flash memory application program
Branch to user program/erase control program in RAM
FWE = high*
Execute user program/erase control program (flash memory rewrite)
Clear FWE
Branch to flash memory application program Note: * Do not constantly apply a high level to the FWE pin. Only apply a high level to the FWE pin when programming or erasing the flash memory. To prevent excessive programming or excessive erasing, while a high level is being applied to the FWE pin, activate the watchdog timer in case of handling CPU runaways.
Figure 16.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 379 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.7
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
A setting in the RAM emulation register (RAMER) enables part of RAM to be overlapped onto the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in RAM in real time. Emulation can be performed in user mode or user program mode. Figure 16.7 shows an example of emulation of real-time flash memory programming. 1. Set RAMER to overlap part of RAM onto the area for which real-time programming is required. 2. Emulation is performed using the overlapping RAM. 3. After the program data has been confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, thus releasing the RAM overlap. 4. The data written in the overlapping RAM is written into the flash memory space (EB0).
Start of emulation program
Set RAMER
Write tuning data to overlap RAM
Execute application program No
Tuning OK? Yes Clear RAMER
Write to flash memory emulation block
End of emulation program
Figure 16.7 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 380 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
An example in which flash memory block area EB0 is overlapped is shown in figure 16.8. 1. The RAM area to be overlapped is fixed at a 1-kbyte area in the range H'FFE000 to H'FFE3FF. 2. The flash memory area to overlap is selected by RAMER from a 1-kbyte area of the EB0 to EB3 blocks. 3. The overlapped RAM area can be accessed from both the flash memory addresses and RAM addresses. 4. When the RAMS bit in RAMER is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all flash memory blocks (emulation protection). In this state, setting the P1 or E1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. 5. A RAM area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase algorithm. 6. Block area EB0 contains the vector table. When performing RAM emulation, the vector table is needed in the overlap RAM.
H'000000 Flash memory (EB0) H'0003FF H'000400 (EB1) H'0007FF H'000800 (EB2) H'000BFF H'000C00 (EB3) H'000FFF (EB3) Flash memory (EB2) On-chip RAM (Shadow of H'FFE000 to H'FFE3FF) Flash memory (EB0)
H'FFE000
On-chip RAM (1 kbyte)
On-chip RAM (1 kbyte)
H'FFE3FF Normal memory map RAM overlap memory map
Figure 16.8 Example of RAM Overlap Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 381 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.8
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in accordance with the descriptions in section 16.8.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 16.8.2, Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively. 16.8.1 Program/Program-Verify
When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in Figure 16.9 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. 1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which programming has already been performed. 2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform reprogramming data computation and additional programming data computation according to Figure 16.9. 4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory destination area must be H'00 or H'80. 5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Figure 16.9 shows the allowable programming times. 6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed. 7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2 bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 382 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence of the same bit is 1,000.
Write pulse application subroutine
Start of programming START Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsswe) s
Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area
Apply Write Pulse WDT enable Set PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tspsu) s Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsp) s Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcp) s Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcpsu) s
Disable WDT
Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses.
*7 *4
*7
Start of programming
n=1 m=0
*5 *7
End of programming
Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram data area consecutively to flash memory
*1
Sub-Routine-Call
*7
Apply Write pulse Set PV bit in FLMCR1
See Note *6 for pulse width
*7
Wait (tspv) s
H'FF dummy write to verify address
*7
Wait (tspvr) s End Sub
Increment address Write data = verify data? Read verify data
*7 *2
No m=1 No
nn+1
Note: 6. Write Pulse Width Number of Writes n Write Time (tsp) s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
30 * 30 * 30 * 30 * 30 * 30 * 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Yes 6n?
Yes Additional-programming data computation Transfer additional-programming data to additional-programming data area *4
Reprogram data computation
*3
* Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area 4
128-byte data verification completed?
998 999 1000
200 200 200
No
Yes Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Reprogram Wait (tcpv) s 6 n? No
Note: * Use a 10 s write pulse for additional programming.
*7
RAM
Program data storage area (128 bytes)
Yes Successively write 128-byte data from additional1 programming data area in RAM to flash memory * Sub-Routine-Call Apply Write Pulse (Additional programming) No
Reprogram data storage area (128 bytes)
Additional-programming data storage area (128 bytes)
m=0? Yes Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
n (N)?
*7
No
Yes Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written Wait (tcswe) s Wait (tcswe) s to must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. End of programming Programming failure 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 3. Reprogram data is determined by the operation shown in the table below (comparison between the data stored in the program data area and the verify data). Bits for which the reprogram data is 0 are programmed in the next reprogramming loop. Therefore, even bits for which programming has been completed will be subjected to programming once again if the result of the subsequent verify operation is NG. 4. A 128-byte area for storing program data, a 128-byte area for storing reprogram data, and a 128-byte area for storing additional data must be provided in RAM. The contents of the reprogram data area and additional data area are modified as programming proceeds. 5. A write pulse of 30 s or 200 s is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See note 6 for details of the pulse widths. When writing of additional-programming data is executed, a 10 s write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied. 7. The wait times and value of N are shown in section 20.5, Flash Memory Characteristics.
*7
Reprogram Data Computation Table
Original Data Verify Data Reprogram Data
Additional-Programming Data Computation Table
Comments Programming completed Programming incomplete; reprogram Still in erased state; no action
(D) 0 0 1 1
(V) 0 1 0 1
(X) 1 0 1 1
Reprogram Data Verify Data Additional(X') (V) Programming Data (Y) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Comments Additional programming to be executed Additional programming not to be executed Additional programming not to be executed Additional programming not to be executed
Figure 16.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 383 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.8.2
Erase/Erase-Verify
When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 16.10 should be followed. 1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. 2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. 3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time. 4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed. 5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/eraseverify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify sequence is 100. 16.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons: 1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured. 2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions. 3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be carried out.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 384 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
Start
*1
Perform erasing in block units.
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsswe) s n=1 Set EBR1 or EBR2 Enable WDT Set ESU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsesu) s Set E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tse) ms Clear E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tce) s Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcesu) s Disable WDT Set EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsev) s Set block start address as verify address
*5 *5 *5 *3 *4 *5
Start of erase
*5
Erase halted
*5
nn+1
H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait (tsevr) s Increment address Read verify data Verify data = all 1s? Yes No Last address of block? Yes Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcev) s Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcev) s
*5 *5 *2
No
*5
*5
n (N)? Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcswe) s End of erasing
*5
No
Yes Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcswe) s Erase failure
*5
Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2). Two or more bits must not be set simultaneously. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. The wait times and the value of N are shown in section 20.5, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure 16.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 385 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.9
Program/Erase Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 16.9.1 Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset or standby mode. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), and erase block register 1 (EBR1) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC characteristics section. 16.9.2 Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1 bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block register 1 (EBR1), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 is set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks. 16.9.3 Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered. * When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing (including vector read and instruction fetch) * Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing * When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR1 settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 386 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
entered by re-setting the P1 or E1 bit. However, PV1 and EV1 bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a power-on reset.
16.10
Programmer Mode
In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a socket adapter, just as for a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the Renesas 128-kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device type (FZTAT128V5A).
16.11
Power-Down States for Flash Memory
In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states: * Normal operating mode The flash memory can be read and written to. * Standby mode All flash memory circuits are halted. Table 16.6 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash memory. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from standby mode, a period to stabilize the power supply circuits that were stopped is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR must be set to provide a wait time of at least 20 s, even when the external clock is being used. Table 16.6 Flash Memory Operating States
LSI Operating State Active mode Standby mode Flash Memory Operating State Normal operating mode Standby mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 387 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 16 ROM
16.12
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version
The mask ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 16.7 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 16.7 is read in the mask ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure that the registers in table 16.7 have no effect. Table 16.7 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version
Register Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 RAM emulation register Flash memory power control register Abbreviation FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 RAMER FLPWCR Address H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAA H'FFAB H'FEDB H'FFAC
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 388 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
This LSI has an on-chip clock pulse generator that generates the system clock (), the bus master clock, and internal clocks. The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator, PLL circuit, clock selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, and bus master clock selection circuit. A block diagram of the clock pulse generator is shown in figure 17.1.
LPWRCR STC1, STC0 EXTAL Clock oscillator XTAL PLL circuit (x1, x2, x4) Clock selection circuit
SCKCR SCK2 to SCK0
Mediumspeed clock divider
/2 to /32
Bus master clock selection circuit
System clock to pin [Legend] LPWRCR: Low-power control register SCKCR: System clock control register
Internal clock to supporting modules
Bus master clock to CPU and DTC
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator The frequency can be changed by means of the PLL circuit. Frequency changes are performed by software by settings in the low-power control register (LPWRCR) and system clock control register (SCKCR).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 389 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
17.1
Register Descriptions
The on-chip clock pulse generator has the following registers. * System clock control register (SCKCR) * Low-power control register (LPWRCR) 17.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR)
SCKCR performs clock output control, selection of operation when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed, and medium-speed mode control.
Bit 7 Bit Name PSTOP Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Clock Output Disable Controls output. High-speed Mode, Medium-Speed Mode 0: output 1: Fixed high Sleep Mode 0: output 1: Fixed high Software Standby Mode 0: Fixed high 1: Fixed high Hardware Standby Mode 0: High impedance 1: High impedance 6 to 4 -- All 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 390 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
Bit 3
Bit Name STCS
Initial Value 0
R/W R/W
Description Frequency Multiplication Factor Switching Mode Select Selects the operation when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed. 0: Specified multiplication factor is valid after transition to software standby mode 1: Specified multiplication factor is valid immediately after STC1 bit and STC0 bit are rewritten
2 1 0
SCK2 SCK1 SCK0
0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W
System Clock Select 0 to 2 These bits select the bus master clock. 000: High-speed mode 001: Medium-speed clock is /2 010: Medium-speed clock is /4 011: Medium-speed clock is /8 100: Medium-speed clock is /16 101: Medium-speed clock is /32 11X: Setting prohibited
[Legend] X: Don't care
17.1.2
Bit
Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
Bit Name Initial Value All 0 All 0 0 0 R/W -- R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved Only 0 should be written to these bits. These bits can be read and write, but should not be set to 1. Frequency Multiplication Factor The STC bits specify the frequency multiplication factor of the PLL circuit. 00: x1 01: x2 10: x4 11: Setting prohibited
7 to 4 -- 3, 2 1 0 -- STC1 STC0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 391 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
17.2
Oscillator
Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock. In either case, the input clock should not exceed 20 MHz. 17.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator
Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 17.2. Select the damping resistance Rd according to table 17.1. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal should be used.
CL1 EXTAL XTAL Rd CL2 CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22 pF
Figure 17.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) Table 17.1 Damping Resistance Value
Frequency (MHz) Rd () 4 500 8 200 10 0 12 0 16 0 20 0
Figure 17.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator that has the characteristics shown in table 17.2.
CL XTAL L Rs EXTAL
C0
AT-cut parallel-resonance type
Figure 17.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 392 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
Table 17.2 Crystal Resonator Characteristics
Frequency (MHz) RS max () C0 max (pF) 4 120 7 8 80 7 10 70 7 12 60 7 16 50 7 20 40 7
17.2.2
External Clock Input
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 17.4. If the XTAL pin is left open, ensure that stray capacitance does not exceed 10 pF. When complementary clock is input to the XTAL pin, the external clock input should be fixed high in standby mode.
EXTAL XTAL Open
External clock input
(a) XTAL pin left open
EXTAL XTAL
External clock input
(b) Complementary clock input at XTAL pin
Figure 17.4 External Clock Input (Examples)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 393 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
Table 17.3 shows the input conditions for the external clock. Table 17.3 External Clock Input Conditions
VCC = 5.0 V 10% Item External clock input low pulse width External clock input high pulse width External clock rise time External clock fall time Symbol tEXL tEXH tEXr tEXf Min 15 15 -- -- Max -- -- 5 5 Unit ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figure 17.5
tEXH
tEXL VCC x 0.5
EXTAL
tEXr
tEXf
Figure 17.5 External Clock Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 394 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
17.3
PLL Circuit
The PLL circuit multiplies the frequency of the clock from the oscillator by a factor of 1, 2, or 4. The multiplication factor is set by the STC0 bit and the STC1 bit in LPWRCR. The phase of the rising edge of the internal clock is controlled so as to match that at the EXTAL pin. When the multiplication factor of the PLL circuit is changed, the operation varies according to the setting of the STCS bit in SCKCR. When STCS = 0, the setting becomes valid after a transition to software standby mode. The transition time count is performed in accordance with the setting of bits STS0 to STS2 in SBYCR. For details on SBYCR, refer to section 18.1.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The initial PLL circuit multiplication factor is 1. STS0 to STS2 are set to give the specified transition time. The target value is set in STC0 and STC1, and a transition is made to software standby mode. The clock pulse generator stops and the value set in STC0 and STC1 becomes valid. Software standby mode is cleared, and a transition time is secured in accordance with the setting in STS0 to STS2. 6. After the set transition time has elapsed, this LSI resumes operation using the target multiplication factor.
If a PC break is set for the SLEEP instruction, software standby mode is entered and break exception handling is executed after the oscillation stabilization time. In this case, the instruction following the SLEEP instruction is executed after execution of the RTE instruction. When STCS = 1, this LSI operates on the changed multiplication factor immediately after bits STC0 and STC1 are rewritten.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 395 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
17.4
Medium-Speed Clock Divider
The medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock to generate /2, /4, /8, /16, and /32.
17.5
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit
The bus master clock selection circuit selects the clock supplied to the bus master by setting the bits SCK 2 to SCK 0 in SCKCR. The bus master clock can be selected from high-speed mode, or medium-speed clocks (/2, /4, /8, /16, /32).
17.6
17.6.1
Usage Notes
Note on Crystal Resonator
As various characteristics related to the crystal resonator are closely linked to the user's board design, thorough evaluation is necessary on the user's part, using the resonator connection examples shown in this section as a guide. As the resonator circuit ratings will depend on the floating capacitance of the resonator and the mounting circuit, the ratings should be determined in consultation with the resonator manufacturer. The design must ensure that a voltage exceeding the maximum rating is not applied to the oscillator pin. 17.6.2 Note on Board Design
When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit, as shown in figure 17.6. This is to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation.
Avoid CL2 Signal A Signal B This LSI XTAL EXTAL CL1
Figure 17.6 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 396 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
Figure 17.7 shows external circuitry recommended to be provided around the PLL circuit. Place oscillation stabilization capacitor C1 and resistor R1 close to the PLLCAP pin, and ensure that no other signal lines cross this line. Separate PLLVcL and PLLVss from the other Vcc and Vss lines at the board power supply source, and be sure to insert bypass capacitors CB close to the pins.
R1 : 3 k
C1 : 470 pF
PLLCAP PLLVCL
CB : 0.1 F
PLLVSS VCL VCC
CB : 0.1 F* CB : 0.1 F
VSS (Values are preliminary recommended values) Note: * CB are laminated ceramic.
Figure 17.7 External Circuitry Recommended for PLL Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 397 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 17 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 398 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has five power-down modes in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip peripheral modules, and so on. This LSI's operating modes are as follows: (1) High-speed mode (2) Medium-speed mode (3) Sleep mode (4) Module stop mode (5) Software standby mode (6) Hardware standby mode (2) to (6) are power-down modes. Sleep mode is a CPU state, medium-speed mode is a CPU and bus master state, and module stop mode is an internal peripheral function (including bus masters other than the CPU) state. Some of these states can be combined. After a reset, the LSI is in high-speed mode. Figure 18.1 shows a mode transition. Table 18.1 shows the conditions of transition between modes when executing the SLEEP instruction and the state after transition back from low power mode due to an interrupt. Table 18.2 shows the internal state of the LSI in each mode. Table 18.1 Low Power Dissipation Mode Transition Conditions
Status of Control Bit at Transition SSBY 0 1 State after Transition Invoked by SLEEP Command Sleep Software standby State after Transition Back from Low Power Mode Invoked by Interrupt High-speed/Medium-speed High-speed/Medium-speed
Pre-Transition State High-speed/ Medium-speed
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 399 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
Program-halted state STBY pin = Low Reset state Hardware standby mode
STBY pin = High RES pin = Low
RES pin = High Program execution state SLEEP command High-speed mode (main clock) Any interrupt SLEEP command External interrupt* SSBY = 0 Sleep mode (main clock)
SCK2 to SCK0 = 0
SCK2 to SCK0 0
SSBY = 1 Software standby mode
Medium-speed mode (main clock)
: Transition after exception processing
: Low power dissipation mode
Notes: When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, the transition cannot be made on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after accepting the interrupt request. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs when RES is driven low. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY is driven low. * NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ5
Figure 18.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 400 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
Table 18.2 LSI Internal States in Each Mode
Function System clock pulse generator CPU Instructions Registers MediumHigh-Speed Speed Functioning Functioning Functioning Mediumspeed operation Functioning Sleep Functioning Halted (retained) Module Stop Functioning High/ mediumspeed operation Functioning Software Standby Halted Halted (retained) Hardware Standby Halted Halted (undefined)
External interrupts
NMI IRQ0 to IRQ5 PBC DTC I/O TPU PPG WDT SCI A/D RAM
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Peripheral functions
Functioning
Mediumspeed operation Functioning Functioning
Functioning
Halted (retained) Functioning Halted (retained) Functioning Halted (reset) Functioning
Halted (retained) Retained Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Retained
Halted (reset) High impedance Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Retained
Functioning Functioning
Functioning Functioning
Functioning Functioning
Functioning Functioning
Functioning Functioning
Functioning
Mediumspeed operation
Functioning (DTC)
Note: "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is "operation suspended". "Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized. In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted (reset or retained).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 401 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.1
Register Descriptions
Registers related to the power down mode are shown below. For details on the system clock control register (SCKCR), refer to section 17.1.1, System Clock Control Register (SCKCR). * * * * * System clock control register (SCKCR) Standby control register (SBYCR) Module stop control register A (MSTPCRA) Module stop control register B (MSTPCRB) Module stop control register C (MSTPCRC) Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
18.1.1
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs software standby mode control.
Bit 7 Bit Name SSBY Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Software Standby This bit specifies the transition mode after executing the SLEEP instruction 0: Shifts to sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed 1: Shifts to software standby mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed This bit does not change when clearing the software standby mode by using external interrupts and shifting to normal operation. This bit should be written with 0 when clearing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 402 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
Bit 6 5 4
Bit Name STS2 STS1 STS0
Initial Value 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
Description Standby Timer Select 0 to 2 These bits select the MCU wait time for clock stabilization when software standby mode is cancelled by an external interrupt. With a crystal oscillator (table 18.3), select a wait time of 8ms (oscillation stabilization time) or more, depending on the operating frequency. With an external clock, select a wait time of 2 ms or more. 000: Standby time = 8192 states 001: Standby time = 16384 states 010: Standby time = 32768 states 011: Standby time = 65536 states 100: Standby time = 131072 states 101: Standby time = 262144 states 110: Reserved 111: Standby time = 16 states
3 2 to 0
-- --
1 All 0
R/W --
Reserved Only 1 should be written to this bit. Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 403 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.1.2
Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC)
MSTPCR is comprised of three 8-bit readable/writable registers, and performs module stop mode control. Setting a bit to 1 causes the corresponding module to enter module stop mode. Clearing the bit to 0 clears the module stop mode. MSTPCRA
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name MSTPA7* MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4* MSTPA3 MSTPA2* MSTPA1 MSTPA0* Initial Value 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W A/D converter Programmable pulse generator (PPG) Data transfer controller (DTC) 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) Module
MSTPCRB
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4* MSTPB3* MSTPB2* MSTPB1* MSTPB0* Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module Serial communication interface 0 (SCI0) Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1) Serial communication interface 2 (SCI2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 404 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
MSTPCRC
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name MSTPC7* MSTPC6* MSTPC5* MSTPC4 MSTPC3* MSTPC2* MSTPC1* MSTPC0* * Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PC break controller (PBC) Module
MSTPA7 is a readable/writable bit with an initial value of 0 and should always be written with 0. MSTPA4, MSTPA2, MSTPA0, MSTPB4 to MSTPB0, MSTPC7 to MSTPC5, MSTPC3 to MSTPC0 are readable/writable bits with an initial value of 1 and should always be written with 1.
18.2
Medium-Speed Mode
When the SCK0 to SCK2 bits in SCKCR are set to 1, the operating mode changes to mediumspeed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on the operating clock (/2, /4, /8, /16, or /32) specified by the SCK0 to SCK2 bits. Bus masters (DTC) other than the CPU also operate in medium-speed mode. On-chip peripheral modules other than bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock (). In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to the bus master operating clock. For example, if /4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states. Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK0 to SCK2 to 0. A transition is made to high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle. If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit = 1, operation shifts to the software standby mode. When software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 405 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
When the RES pin is set low and medium-speed mode is cancelled, operation shifts to the reset state. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer. When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Figure 18.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.
Medium-speed mode , supporting module clock
Bus master clock
Internal address bus
SCKCR
SCKCR
Internal write signal
Figure 18.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 406 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.3
18.3.1
Sleep Mode
Transition to Sleep Mode
If SLEEP instruction is executed when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, the CPU enters the sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops, however the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other peripheral modules do not stop. 18.3.2 Clearing Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is cleared by any interrupt, or signals at the RES, or STBY pins. * Exiting Sleep Mode by Interrupts: When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt exception processing starts. Sleep mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or if interrupts other than NMI are masked by the CPU. * Exiting Sleep Mode by RES pin: Setting the RES pin Low selects the reset state. After the stipulated reset input duration, driving the RES pin High restart the CPU performing reset exception processing. * Exiting Sleep Mode by STBY pin: When the STBY pin level is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 407 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.4
18.4.1
Software Standby Mode
Transition to Software Standby Mode
A transition is made to software standby mode if the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SBYCR SSBY bit is set to 1. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip peripheral modules, and oscillator, all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers, on-chip RAM data, and the states of on-chip peripheral modules other than the SCI and A/D converter, and the states of I/O ports, are retained. In this mode, the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced. 18.4.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode
Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pins IRQ0 to IRQ5), or by means of the RES pin or STBY pin. * Clearing with an interrupt: When an NMI or IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and after the time set in bits STS0 to STS2 in SBYCR has elapsed, stable clocks are supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started. When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt, set the corresponding enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the CPU side or has been designated as a DTC activation source. * Clearing with the RES pin: When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset exception handling. * Clearing with the STBY pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 408 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.4.3
Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below. * Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS0 to STS2 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation stabilization time). Table 18.3 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits STS0 to STS2. * Using an External Clock: The PLL circuit requires a time for stabilization. Set bits STS0 to STS2 so that the standby time is at least 2 ms. Table 18.3 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings
STS2 0 STS1 0 STS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Standby Time 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states Reserved 16 states* 20 MHz 0.41 0.82 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 -- 0.8 16 MHz 0.51 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 -- 1.0 12 MHz 0.68 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9 21.8 -- 1.3 10 MHz 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 26.2 -- 1.6 8 MHz 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 -- 2.0 6 MHz 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9 21.8 43.6 -- 1.7 4 MHz 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 65.6 -- 4.0 -- s Unit ms
Note:
: Recommended time setting * Setting prohibited
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 409 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.4.4
Software Standby Mode Application Example
Figure 18.3 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at a falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at a rising edge on the NMI pin. In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode. Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin.
Oscillator
NMI
NMIEG
SSBY
Software standby mode NMI exception (power-down mode) handling NMIEG = 1 SSBY = 1 SLEEP instruction
NMI exception handling Oscillation stabilization time tOSC2
Figure 18.3 Software Standby Mode Application Example
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 410 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.5
18.5.1
Hardware Standby Mode
Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode. In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a significant reduction in power dissipation. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state. In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before driving the STBY pin low. Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD0 to MD2) while this LSI is in hardware standby mode.
18.5.2
Clearing Hardware Standby Mode
Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started. Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillator stabilizes (at least 8 ms--the oscillation stabilization time--when using a crystal oscillator). When the RES pin is subsequently driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling state.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 411 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.5.3
Hardware Standby Mode Timings
Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode 1. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR Drive the RES signal low at least 10 states before the STBY signal goes low, as shown in figure 18.4. After STBY has gone low, RES has to wait for at least 0 ns before becoming high.
STBY t1 10 tcyc RES t2 0 ns
Figure 18.4 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode 2. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, or when RAM contents do not need to be retained RES does not have to be driven low as in the above case. Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Drive the RES signal low approximately 100 ns or more before STBY goes high to execute a power-on reset.
STBY t 100 ns RES tOSC1
Figure 18.5 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 412 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.6
Module Stop Mode
Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip peripheral modules. When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating independently. When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules other than the SCI* and A/D converter are retained. After reset clearance, all modules other than DTC are in module stop mode. When an on-chip peripheral module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is disabled. Note: * The internal states of some SCI registers are retained.
18.7
Clock Output Disabling Function
The output of the clock can be controlled by means of the PSTOP bit in SCKCR, and DDR for the corresponding port. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, the clock stops at the end of the bus cycle, and output goes high. clock output is enabled when the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0. When DDR for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, clock output is disabled and input port mode is set. Table 18.4 shows the state of the pin in each processing state. Table 18.4 Pin State in Each Processing State
Register Settings DDR 0 1 1 PSTOP X 0 1 Normal Mode High impedance output Fixed high Sleep Mode High impedance output Fixed high Software Standby Mode High impedance Fixed high Fixed high Hardware Standby Mode High impedance High impedance High impedance
[Legend] X: Don't care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 413 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 18 Power-Down Modes
18.8
18.8.1
Usage Notes
I/O Port Status
In software standby mode, I/O port states are retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output. 18.8.2 Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period
Current dissipation increases during the oscillation stabilization wait period. 18.8.3 DTC Module Stop
Depending on the operating status of the DTC, MSTPA6 bit may not be set to 1. Setting of the DTC module stop mode should be carried out only when the respective module is not activated. For details, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). 18.8.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt
Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in module stop mode. Consequently, if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. 18.8.5 Writing to MSTPCR
MSTPCR should only be written to by the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 414 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Section 19 List of Registers
The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown below. 1. * * * * 2. * * * * 3. * * Register addresses (address order) Registers are listed in the order of ascending addresses. For 16-bit registers, the addresses of MSB are shown. Registers are classified according to functional modules. The access size is indicated. Register bits Bit configurations of the registers are listed in the same order as the register addresses. Reserved bits are indicated by "" in the bit name columns. Registers for which bit numbers are shown are those operate as counters or hold data. For 16-bit registers, bits in MSB are shown in the upper line and bits in LSB in the lower line. Register states in each operating mode Register states are listed in the same order as the register addresses. The register states shown here are for the basic operating modes. If an on-chip module has its own reset state, refer to the section on that on-chip module.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 415 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
19.1
Register Addresses
Abbreviation Bit No. Address* Module SBYCR SYSCR SCKCR MDCR 8 8 8 8 H'FDE4 H'FDE5 H'FDE6 H'FDE7 H'FDE8 H'FDE9 H'FDEA H'FDEC H'FE00 H'FE04 H'FE08 H'FE09 H'FE12 H'FE13 H'FE14 H'FE15 H'FE16 H'FE17 H'FE18 H'FE19 H'FE1A H'FE1B H'FE1C H'FE1F H'FE26 H'FE27 H'FE28 H'FE29 H'FE2A H'FE2B H'FE2C H'FE2D Data Width Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Register Name Standby control register System control register System clock control register Mode control register Module stop control register A Module stop control register B Module stop control register C Low-power control register Break address register A Break address register B Break control register A Break control register B IRQ sense control register H IRQ sense control register L IRQ enable register IRQ status register DTC enable register A DTC enable register B DTC enable register C DTC enable register D DTC enable register E DTC enable register F DTC enable register G DTC vector register PPG output control register PPG output mode register Next data enable register H Next data enable register L Output data register H Output data register L Next data register H Next data register L
SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 SYSTEM 8 PBC PBC PBC PBC INT INT INT INT DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG 32 32 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
MSTPCRA 8 MSTPCRB 8 MSTPCRC 8 LPWRCR BARA BARB BCRA BCRB ISCRH ISCRL IER ISR DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTCERF DTCERG DTVECR PCR PMR NDERH NDERL PODRH PODRL NDRH NDRL 8 32 32 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 416 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name Next data register H Next data register L Port 1 data direction register Port A data direction register Port B data direction register Port C data direction register Port D data direction register Port F data direction register
Abbreviation Bit No. Address* Module NDRH NDRL P1DDR PADDR PBDDR PCDDR PDDDR PFDDR 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FE2E H'FE2F H'FE30 H'FE39 H'FE3A H'FE3B H'FE3C H'FE3E H'FE40 H'FE41 H'FE42 H'FE43 H'FE47 H'FE48 H'FE49 H'FE80 H'FE81 H'FE82 H'FE83 H'FE84 H'FE85 H'FE86 H'FE87 H'FE88 H'FE89 H'FE8A H'FE8B H'FE8C H'FE8D H'FE8E H'FE8F H'FE90 H'FE91 PPG PPG PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_4 TPU_4
Data Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Port A pull-up MOS control register PAPCR Port B pull-up MOS control register PBPCR Port C pull-up MOS control register PCPCR Port D pull-up MOS control register PDPCR Port A open drain control register Port B open drain control register Port C open drain control register Timer control register_3 Timer mode register_3 Timer I/O control register H_3 Timer I/O control register L_3 Timer interrupt enable register_3 Timer status register_3 Timer counter H_3 Timer counter L_3 Timer general register AH_3 Timer general register AL_3 Timer general register BH_3 Timer general register BL_3 Timer general register CH_3 Timer general register CL_3 Timer general register DH_3 Timer general register DL_3 Timer control register_4 Timer mode register_4 PAODR PBODR PCODR TCR_3 TMDR_3 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIER_3 TSR_3 TCNTH_3 TCNTL_3 TGRAL_3 TGRBL_3 TGRCL_3 TGRDL_3 TCR_4 TMDR_4
TGRAH_3 8 TGRBH_3 8 TGRCH_3 8 TGRDH_3 8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 417 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name Timer I/O control register_4 Timer interrupt enable register_4 Timer status register_4 Timer counter H_4 Timer counter L_4 Timer general register AH_4 Timer general register AL_4 Timer general register BH_4 Timer general register BL_4 Timer control register_5 Timer mode register_5 Timer I/O control register_5 Timer interrupt enable register_5 Timer status register_5 Timer counter H_5 Timer counter L_5 Timer general register AH_5 Timer general register AL_5 Timer general register BH_5 Timer general register BL_5 Timer start register Timer synchro register Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B Interrupt priority register C Interrupt priority register D Interrupt priority register E Interrupt priority register F Interrupt priority register G Interrupt priority register H Interrupt priority register J
Abbreviation Bit No. Address* Module TIOR_4 TIER_4 TSR_4 TCNTH_4 TCNTL_4 TGRAL_4 TGRBL_4 TCR_5 TMDR_5 TIOR_5 TIER_5 TSR_5 TCNTH_5 TCNTL_5 TGRAL_5 TGRBL_5 TSTR TSYR IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD IPRE IPRF IPRG IPRH IPRJ 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FE92 H'FE94 H'FE95 H'FE96 H'FE97 H'FE98 H'FE99 H'FE9A H'FE9B H'FEA0 H'FEA1 H'FEA2 H'FEA4 H'FEA5 H'FEA6 H'FEA7 H'FEA8 H'FEA9 H'FEAA H'FEAB H'FEB0 H'FEB1 H'FEC0 H'FEC1 H'FEC2 H'FEC3 H'FEC4 H'FEC5 H'FEC6 H'FEC7 H'FEC9 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5
Data Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
TGRAH_4 8 TGRBH_4 8
TGRAH_5 8 TGRBH_5 8
TPU 16 common TPU 16 common INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 418 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name Interrupt priority register K Interrupt priority register M RAM emulation register Port 1 data register Port A data register Port B data register Port C data register Port D data register Port F data register Timer control register_0 Timer mode register_0 Timer I/O control register H_0 Timer I/O control register L_0 Timer interrupt enable register_0 Timer status register_0 Timer counter H_0 Timer counter L_0 Timer general register AH_0 Timer general register AL_0 Timer general register BH_0 Timer general register BL_0 Timer general register CH_0 Timer general register CL_0 Timer general register DH_0 Timer general register DL_0 Timer control register_1 Timer mode register_1 Timer I/O control register_1 Timer interrupt enable register_1 Timer status register_1 Timer counter H_1 Timer counter L_1
Abbreviation Bit No. Address* Module IPRK IPRM RAMER P1DR PADR PBDR PCDR PDDR PFDR TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNTH_0 TCNTL_0 TGRAL_0 TGRBL_0 TGRCL_0 TGRDL_0 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNTH_1 TCNTL_1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FECA H'FECC H'FEDB H'FF00 H'FF09 H'FF0A H'FF0B H'FF0C H'FF0E H'FF10 H'FF11 H'FF12 H'FF13 H'FF14 H'FF15 H'FF16 H'FF17 H'FF18 H'FF19 H'FF1A H'FF1B H'FF1C H'FF1D H'FF1E H'FF1F H'FF20 H'FF21 H'FF22 H'FF24 H'FF25 H'FF26 H'FF27 INT INT ROM PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1
Data Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
TGRAH_0 8 TGRBH_0 8 TGRCH_0 8 TGRDH_0 8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 419 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name Timer general register AH_1 Timer general register AL_1 Timer general register BH_1 Timer general register BL_1 Timer control register_2 Timer mode register_2 Timer I/O control register_2 Timer interrupt enable register_2 Timer status register_2 Timer counter H_2 Timer counter L_2 Timer general register AH_2 Timer general register AL_2 Timer general register BH_2 Timer general register BL_2 Timer control/status register Timer counter Reset control/status register Serial mode register_0 Bit rate register_0 Serial control register_0 Transmit data register_0 Serial status register_0 Receive data register_0 Smart card mode register_0 Serial mode register_1 Bit rate register_1 Serial control register_1 Transmit data register_1 Serial status register_1 Receive data register_1 Smart card mode register_1
Abbreviation Bit No. Address* Module TGRAH_1 8 TGRAL_1 TGRBL_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNTH_2 TCNTL_2 TGRAL_2 TGRBL_2 TCSR TCNT RSTCSR SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SCMR_0 SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 TGRBH_1 8 H'FF28 H'FF29 H'FF2A H'FF2B H'FF30 H'FF31 H'FF32 H'FF34 H'FF35 H'FF36 H'FF37 H'FF38 H'FF39 H'FF3A H'FF3B H'FF74 H'FF75 H'FF77 H'FF78 H'FF79 H'FF7A H'FF7B H'FF7C H'FF7D H'FF7E H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 H'FF83 H'FF84 H'FF85 H'FF86 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 WDT WDT WDT SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1
Data Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
TGRAH_2 8 TGRBH_2 8
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 420 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name Serial mode register_2 Bit rate register_2 Serial control register_2 Transmit data register_2 Serial status register_2 Receive data register_2 Smart card mode register_2 A/D data register AH A/D data register AL A/D data register BH A/D data register BL A/D data register CH A/D data register CL A/D data register DH A/D data register DL A/D control/status register A/D control register Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control registe 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Port 1 register Port 4 register Port 9 register Port A register Port B register Port C register Port D register Port F register Note: *
Abbreviation Bit No. Address* Module SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SCMR_2 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 PORT1 PORT4 PORT9 PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTF 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FF88 H'FF89 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF93 H'FF94 H'FF95 H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 H'FF99 H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAA H'FFAB H'FFB0 H'FFB3 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 H'FFBA H'FFBB H'FFBC H'FFBE SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D ROM ROM ROM ROM PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT
Data Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 421 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
19.2
Register Name SBYCR SYSCR SCKCR MDCR MSTPCRA MSTPCRB MSTPCRC LPWRCR BARA
Register Bits
Bit 7 SSBY MACS PSTOP -- MSTPA7 MSTPB7 MSTPC7 -- -- BAA23 BAA15 BAA7 Bit 6 STS2 -- -- -- MSTPA6 MSTPB6 MSTPC6 -- -- BAA22 BAA14 BAA6 -- BAB22 BAB14 BAB6 CDA CDB -- IRQ3SCA -- -- DTCEA6 DTCEB6 DTCEC6 DTCED6 DTCEE6 DTCEF6 DTCEG6 DTVEC6 G3CMS0 G2INV NDER14 NDER6 POD14 POD6 NDR14 NDR6 -- -- Bit 5 STS1 INTM1 -- -- MSTPA5 MSTPB5 MSTPC5 -- -- BAA21 BAA13 BAA5 -- BAB21 BAB13 BAB5 BAMRA2 BAMRB2 -- IRQ2SCB IRQ5E IRQ5F DTCEA5 DTCEB5 DTCEC5 DTCED5 DTCEE5 DTCEF5 DTCEG5 DTVEC5 G2CMS1 -- NDER13 NDER5 POD13 POD5 NDR13 NDR5 -- -- Bit 4 STS0 INTM0 -- -- MSTPA4 MSTPB4 MSTPC4 -- -- BAA20 BAA12 BAA4 -- BAB20 BAB12 BAB4 BAMRA1 BAMRB1 -- IRQ2SCA IRQ4E IRQ4F DTCEA4 DTCEB4 DTCEC4 DTCED4 DTCEE4 DTCEF4 DTCEG4 DTVEC4 G2CMS0 -- NDER12 NDER4 POD12 POD4 NDR12 NDR4 -- -- Bit 3 -- NMIEG STCS -- MSTPA3 MSTPB3 MSTPC3 -- -- BAA19 BAA11 BAA3 -- BAB19 BAB11 BAB3 BAMRA0 BAMRB0 IRQ5SCB IRQ1SCB IRQ3E IRQ3F DTCEA3 DTCEB3 DTCEC3 DTCED3 DTCEE3 DTCEF3 DTCEG3 DTVEC3 G1CMS1 G3NOV NDER11 NDER3 POD11 POD3 NDR11 NDR3 NDR11 NDR3 Bit 2 -- -- SCK2 MDS2 MSTPA2 MSTPB2 MSTPC2 -- -- BAA18 BAA10 BAA2 -- BAB18 BAB10 BAB2 CSELA1 CSELB1 IRQ5SCA IRQ1SCA IRQ2E IRQ2F DTCEA2 DTCEB2 DTCEC2 DTCED2 DTCEE2 DTCEF2 DTCEG2 DTVEC2 G1CMS0 G2NOV NDER10 NDER2 POD10 POD2 NDR10 NDR2 NDR10 NDR2 Bit 1 -- -- SCK1 MDS1 MSTPA1 MSTPB1 MSTPC1 STC1 -- BAA17 BAA9 BAA1 -- BAB17 BAB9 BAB1 CSELA0 CSELB0 IRQ4SCB IRQ0SCB IRQ1E IRQ1F DTCEA1 DTCEB1 DTCEC1 DTCED1 DTCEE1 DTCEF1 DTCEG1 DTVEC1 G0CMS1 -- NDER9 NDER1 POD9 POD1 NDR9 NDR1 NDR9 NDR1 Bit 0 -- RAME SCK0 MDS0 MSTPA0 MSTPB0 MSTPC0 STC0 -- BAA16 BAA8 BAA0 -- BAB16 BAB8 BAB0 BIEA BIEB IRQ4SCA IRQ0SCA IRQ0E IRQ0F DTCEA0 DTCEB0 DTCEC0 DTCED0 DTCEE0 DTCEF0 DTCEG0 DTVEC0 G0CMS0 -- NDER8 NDER0 POD8 POD0 NDR8 NDR0 NDR8 NDR0 PPG DTC INT PBC Module SYSTEM
BARB
-- BAB23 BAB15 BAB7
BCRA BCRB ISCRH ISCRL IER ISR DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTCERF DTCERG DTVECR PCR PMR NDERH NDERL PODRH PODRL NDRH NDRL NDRH NDRL
CMFA CMFB -- IRQ3SCB -- -- DTCEA7 DTCEB7 DTCEC7 DTCED7 DTCEE7 DTCEF7 DTCEG7 SWDTE G3CMS1 G3INV NDER15 NDER7 POD15 POD7 NDR15 NDR7 -- --
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 422 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name P1DDR PADDR PBDDR PCDDR PDDDR PFDDR PAPCR PBPCR PCPCR PDPCR PAODR PBODR PCODR TCR_3 TMDR_3 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIER_3 TSR_3 TCNTH_3 TCNTL_3 TGRAH_3 TGRAL_3 TGRBH_3 TGRBL_3 TGRCH_3 TGRCL_3 TGRDH_3 TGRDL_3 TCR_4 TMDR_4 TIOR_4 TIER_4 TSR_4 TCNTH_4 TCNTL_4 TGRAH_4 TGRAL_4 TGRBH_4 TGRBL_4 TCR_5 TMDR_5
Bit 7 P17DDR -- PB7DDR PC7DDR PD7DDR PF7DDR -- PB7PCR PC7PCR PD7PCR -- PB7ODR PC7ODR CCLR2 -- IOB3 IOD3 TTGE -- Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 -- --
Bit 6 P16DDR -- PB6DDR PC6DDR PD6DDR PF6DDR -- PB6PCR PC6PCR PD6PCR -- PB6ODR PC6ODR CCLR1 -- IOB2 IOD2 -- -- Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 CCLR1 --
Bit 5 P15DDR -- PB5DDR PC5DDR PD5DDR PF5DDR -- PB5PCR PC5PCR PD5PCR -- PB5ODR PC5ODR CCLR0 BFB IOB1 IOD1 -- -- Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 CCLR0 --
Bit 4 P14DDR -- PB4DDR PC4DDR PD4DDR PF4DDR -- PB4PCR PC4PCR PD4PCR -- PB4ODR PC4ODR CKEG1 BFA IOB0 IOD0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 CKEG1 --
Bit 3 P13DDR PA3DDR PB3DDR PC3DDR PD3DDR PF3DDR PA3PCR PB3PCR PC3PCR PD3PCR PA3ODR PB3ODR PC3ODR CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 IOC3 TGIED TGFD Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 CKEG0 MD3
Bit 2 P12DDR PA2DDR PB2DDR PC2DDR PD2DDR PF2DDR PA2PCR PB2PCR PC2PCR PD2PCR PA2ODR PB2ODR PC2ODR TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 IOC2 TGIEC TGFC Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 TPSC2 MD2
Bit 1 P11DDR PA1DDR PB1DDR PC1DDR PD1DDR PF1DDR PA1PCR PB1PCR PC1PCR PD1PCR PA1ODR PB1ODR PC1ODR TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 IOC1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 TPSC1 MD1
Bit 0 P10DDR PA0DDR PB0DDR PC0DDR PD0DDR PF0DDR PA0PCR PB0PCR PC0PCR PD0PCR PA0ODR PB0ODR PC0ODR TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 IOC0 TGIEA TGFA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 TPSC0 MD0
Module PORT
TPU_3
TPU_4
TPU_5
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 423 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name TIOR_5 TIER_5 TSR_5 TCNTH_5 TCNTL_5 TGRAH_5 TGRAL_5 TGRBH_5 TGRBL_5 TSTR TSYR IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD IPRE IPRF IPRG IPRH IPRJ IPRK IPRM RAMER P1DR PADR PBDR PCDR PDDR PFDR TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNTH_0 TCNTL_0 TGRAH_0 TGRAL_0 TGRBH_0 TGRBL_0 TGRCH_0
Bit 7 IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P17DR -- PB7DR PC7DR PD7DR PF7DR CCLR2 -- IOB3 IOD3 TTGE -- Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15
Bit 6 IOB2 -- -- Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 -- -- IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 IPR6 -- P16DR -- PB6DR PC6DR PD6DR PF6DR CCLR1 -- IOB2 IOD2 -- -- Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14
Bit 5 IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 CST5 SYNC5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 IPR5 -- P15DR -- PB5DR PC5DR PD5DR PF5DR CCLR0 BFB IOB1 IOD1 -- -- Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13
Bit 4 IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 CST4 SYNC4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 IPR4 -- P14DR -- PB4DR PC4DR PD4DR PF4DR CKEG1 BFA IOB0 IOD0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12
Bit 3 IOA3 -- -- Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 CST3 SYNC3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RAMS P13DR PA3DR PB3DR PC3DR PD3DR PF3DR CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 IOC3 TGIED TGFD Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11
Bit 2 IOA2 -- -- Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 CST2 SYNC2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 IPR2 RAM2 P12DR PA2DR PB2DR PC2DR PD2DR PF2DR TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 IOC2 TGIEC TGFC Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10
Bit 1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 CST1 SYNC1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 IPR1 RAM1 P11DR PA1DR PB1DR PC1DR PD1DR PF1DR TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 IOC1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9
Bit 0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 CST0 SYNC0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 IPR0 RAM0 P10DR PA0DR PB0DR PC0DR PD0DR PF0DR TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 IOC0 TGIEA TGFA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8
Module TPU_5
TPU common
INT
ROM PORT
TPU_0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 424 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name TGRCL_0 TGRDH_0 TGRDL_0 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNTH_1 TCNTL_1 TGRAH_1 TGRAL_1 TGRBH_1 TGRBL_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNTH_2 TCNTL_2 TGRAH_2 TGRAL_2 TGRBH_2 TGRBL_2 TCSR TCNT RSTCSR SMR_0*3 (SMR_0*4) BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0*3 (SSR_0*4) RDR_0 SCMR_0 SMR_1*3 (SMR_1*4) BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1
Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 OVF Bit 7 WOVF C/A (GM) Bit 7 TIE Bit 7 TDRE (TDRE) Bit 7 -- C/A (GM) Bit 7 TIE Bit 7
Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 WT/IT Bit 6 RSTE CHR (BLK) Bit 6 RIE Bit 6 RDRF (RDRF) Bit 6 -- CHR (BLK) Bit 6 RIE Bit 6
Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 TME Bit 5 RSTS PE (PE) Bit 5 TE Bit 5 ORER (ORER) Bit 5 -- PE (PE) Bit 5 TE Bit 5
Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 -- Bit 4 -- O/E (O/E) Bit 4 RE Bit 4 FER (ERS) Bit 4 -- O/E (O/E) Bit 4 RE Bit 4
Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 -- Bit 3 -- STOP (BCP1) Bit 3 MPIE Bit 3 PER (PER) Bit 3 SDIR STOP (BCP1) Bit 3 MPIE Bit 3
Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 CKS2 Bit 2 -- MP (BCP0) Bit 2 TEIE Bit 2 TEND (TEND) Bit 2 SINV MP (BCP0) Bit 2 TEIE Bit 2
Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 CKS1 Bit 1 -- CKS1 (CKS1) Bit 1 CKE1 Bit 1 MPB (MPB) Bit 1 -- CKS1 (CKS1) Bit 1 CKE1 Bit 1
Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 CKS0 Bit 0 -- CKS0 (CKS0) Bit 0 CKE0 Bit 0 MPBT (MPBT) Bit 0 SMIF CKS0 (CKS0) Bit 0 CKE0 Bit 0
Module TPU_0
TPU_1
TPU_2
WDT
SCI_0
SCI_1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 425 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Register Name SSR_1*1 (SSR_1*2) RDR_1 SCMR_1 SMR_2*1 (SMR_2*2) BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2*1 (SSR_2*2) RDR_2 SCMR_2 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 PORT1 PORT4 PORT9 PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTF
Bit 7 TDRE (TDRE) Bit 7 -- C/A (GM) Bit 7 TIE Bit 7 TDRE (TDRE) Bit 7 -- AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 ADF TRGS1 FWE FLER EB7 -- P17 P47 -- -- PB7 PC7 PD7 PF7
Bit 6 RDRF (RDRF) Bit 6 -- CHR (BLK) Bit 6 RIE Bit 6 RDRF (RDRF) Bit 6 -- AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE TRGS0 SWE -- EB6 -- P16 P46 -- -- PB6 PC6 PD6 PF6
Bit 5 ORER (ORER) Bit 5 -- PE (PE) Bit 5 TE Bit 5 ORER (ORER) Bit 5 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- ADST -- ESU1 -- EB5 -- P15 P45 -- -- PB5 PC5 PD5 PF5
Bit 4 FER (ERS) Bit 4 -- O/E (O/E) Bit 4 RE Bit 4 FER (ERS) Bit 4 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- SCAN -- PSU1 -- EB4 -- P14 P44 -- -- PB4 PC4 PD4 PF4
Bit 3 PER (PER) Bit 3 SDIR STOP (BCP1) Bit 3 MPIE Bit 3 PER (PER) Bit 3 SDIR AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- CH3 CKS1 EV1 -- EB3 -- P13 P43 P93 PA3 PB3 PC3 PD3 PF3
Bit 2 TEND (TEND) Bit 2 SINV MP (BCP0) Bit 2 TEIE Bit 2 TEND (TEND) Bit 2 SINV AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- CH2 CKS0 PV1 -- EB2 -- P12 P42 P92 PA2 PB2 PC2 PD2 PF2
Bit 1 MPB (MPB) Bit 1 -- CKS1 (CKS1) Bit 1 CKE1 Bit 1 MPB (MPB) Bit 1 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- CH1 -- E1 -- EB1 EB9 P11 P41 P91 PA1 PB1 PC1 PD1 PF1
Bit 0 MPBT (MPBT) Bit 0 SMIF CKS0 (CKS0) Bit 0 CKE0 Bit 0 MPBT (MPBT) Bit 0 SMIF AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- CH0 -- P1 -- EB0 EB8 P10 P40 P90 PA0 PB0 PC0 PD0 PF0
Module SCI_1
SCI_2
A/D
ROM
PORT
Notes: 1. Normal serial communication interface mode. 2. Smart Card interface mode. Some bit functions of SMR differ in normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 426 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
19.3
Register States in Each Operating Mode
Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized High-speed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Mediumspeed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Sleep -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Software Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized PORT PPG DTC INT PBC Module SYSTEM
Register Name SBYCR SYSCR SCKCR MDCR MSTPCRA MSTPCRB MSTPCRC LPWRCR BARA BARB BCRA BCRB ISCRH ISCRL IER ISR DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTCERF DTCERG DTVECR PCR PMR NDERH NDERL PODRH PODRL NDRH NDRL NDRH NDRL P1DDR PADDR PBDDR PCDDR PDDDR PFDDR PAPCR PBPCR PCPCR PDPCR PAODR
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 427 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Mediumspeed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Software Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized INT TPU common TPU_5 TPU_4 TPU_3
Register Name PBODR PCODR TCR_3 TMDR_3 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIER_3 TSR_3 TCNTH_3 TCNTL_3 TGRAH_3 TGRAL_3 TGRBH_3 TGRBL_3 TGRCH_3 TGRCL_3 TGRDH_3 TGRDL_3 TCR_4 TMDR_4 TIOR_4 TIER_4 TSR_4 TCNTH_4 TCNTL_4 TGRAH_4 TGRAL_4 TGRBH_4 TGRBL_4 TCR_5 TMDR_5 TIOR_5 TIER_5 TSR_5 TCNTH_5 TCNTL_5 TGRAH_5 TGRAL_5 TGRBH_5 TGRBL_5 TSTR TSYR IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD IPRE IPRF
Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized
High-speed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Sleep -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Module Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Module PORT
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 428 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Mediumspeed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Software Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized TPU_2 TPU_1 TPU_0 ROM PORT
Register Name IPRG IPRH IPRJ IPRK IPRM RAMER P1DR PADR PBDR PCDR PDDR PFDR TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNTH_0 TCNTL_0 TGRAH_0 TGRAL_0 TGRBH_0 TGRBL_0 TGRCH_0 TGRCL_0 TGRDH_0 TGRDL_0 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNTH_1 TCNTL_1 TGRAH_1 TGRAL_1 TGRBH_1 TGRBL_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNTH_2 TCNTL_2
Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized
High-speed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Sleep -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Module Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Module INT
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 429 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Mediumspeed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Software Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized PORT ROM A/D SCI_2 SCI_1 SCI_0 WDT
Register Name TGRAH_2 TGRAL_2 TGRBH_2 TGRBL_2 TCSR TCNT RSTCSR SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SCMR_0 SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SCMR_2 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 PORT1 PORT4 PORT9
Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized
High-speed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Sleep -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Module Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Module TPU_2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 430 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Mediumspeed -- -- -- -- -- Software Standby -- -- -- -- -- Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized
Register Name PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTF
Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized
High-speed -- -- -- -- --
Sleep -- -- -- -- --
Module Stop -- -- -- -- --
Module PORT
Note:
--
is not initialized.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 431 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 19 List of Registers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 432 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 20.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (XTAL, EXTAL) Input voltage (ports 4 and 9) Input voltage (except XTAL, EXTAL, ports 4 and 9) Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC Vin Vin Vin AVCC VAN Topr Tstg Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to VCC + 0.3 -0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 -0.3 to VCC + 0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85 Storage temperature -55 to +125 Unit V V V V V V C C C
Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum rating are exceeded.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 433 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.2
DC Characteristics
Table 20.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 20.3 lists the permissible output currents. Table 20.2 DC Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications)*1
Symbol IRQ0 to IRQ5 VT- VT TPU input capture input TPU external clock Input high voltage VT VT
+
Item Schmitt trigger input voltage
Min. VCC x 0.2 -- VCC x 0.05 VCC x 0.2 -- VCC x 0.05 VCC x 0.9
Typ. -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Max. -- VCC x 0.7 -- -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3
Unit V V V V V V V
Test Conditions
VT+ - VT-
- +
+ - VT - VT
RES, STBY, VIH NMI, MD2 to MD0, FWE EXTAL Ports 1, A to D, F Port 4 and 9
VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7
-- --
VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3
V V
AVCC x 0.7 -- -0.3 --
AVCC + 0.3 V VCC x 0.1 V
Input low voltage
RES, STBY, VIL NMI, MD2 to MD0, FWE EXTAL Ports 1, A to D, F Ports 4 and 9
-0.3 -0.3 -0.3 VCC - 0.5 VCC - 1.0 --
-- -- -- -- -- --
VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.2
V V
AVCC x 0.2 V -- -- 0.4 V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA
Output high voltage Output low voltage
All output pins VOH All output pins VOL
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 434 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol
Min. -- --
Typ. -- --
Max. 1.0 1.0
Unit A A
Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V
| Iin | Input leakage RES current STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0, FWE Ports 4 and 9 Three-state leakage current (off status) Ports 1, A to D, F ITSI
-- --
-- --
1.0 1.0
A A Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V
MOS input Ports A to D pull-up current Input capacitance RES NMI All input pins except RES and NMI Supply current*2 Normal operation Sleep mode All modules stopped Mediumspeed mode (/32) Standby mode Analog During A/D power supply conversion current Idle RAM standby voltage
-IP Cin
30 -- -- --
-- -- -- --
300 30 30 15
A pF pF pF
Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C
ICC*3
-- -- -- --
65 75 mA VCC = 5.0 V VCC = 5.5 V 50 60 mA VCC = 5.0 V VCC = 5.5 V 40 45 -- -- mA mA
f = 20 MHz
f = 20 MHz, VCC = 5.0 V (reference values) Ta 50C 50C < Ta AVCC = 5.0 V
-- -- AlCC -- -- VRAM 2.0
2.0 -- 2.5 -- --
5.0 20 4.0 5.0 --
A A mA A V
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 435 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Notes: 1. If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open. Apply a voltage between 4.5 V and 5.5 V to the AVCC pin by connecting them to VCC, for instance. 2. Supply current values are for VIH = VCC (EXTAL), AVCC (ports 4 and 9), or VCC (other), and VIL = 0 V, with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip MOS pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICC (max.) = 27 + (0.435 x VCC x f) (normal operation) ICC (max.) = 27 + (0.3 x VCC x f) (sleep mode) 4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICC (max.) = 5 + (0.45 x VCC x f) (normal operation) ICC (max.) = 5 + (0.35 x VCC x f) (sleep mode)
Table 20.3 Permissible Output Currents Conditions:
Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) Note: * All output pins Total of all output pins All output pins Total of all output pins
VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications)*
Symbol IOL IOL -IOH -IOH Min. -- -- -- -- Typ. -- -- -- -- Max. 10 100 2.0 30 Unit mA mA mA mA
To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 20.3.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 436 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.3
AC Characteristics
Figure 20.1 shows the test conditions for the AC characteristics.
5V C = 30 pF RL = 2.4 k RH = 12 Input/output timing measurement levels * Low level: 0.8 V * High level: 2.0 V
RL LSI output pin C RH
Figure 20.1 Output Load Circuit 20.3.1 Clock Timing
Table 20.4 lists the clock timing Table 20.4 Clock Timing Conditions : VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (widerange specifications)
Symbol tcyc tCH tCL tCr tCf tOSC1 tOSC2 tDEXT Min. 50 15 15 -- -- 20 8 2 Max. 250 -- -- 10 10 -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms ms ms Figure 20.3 Figure 18.3 Figure 20.3 Test Conditions Figure 20.2
Item Clock cycle time Clock high pulse width Clock low pulse width Clock rise time Clock fall time Oscillation stabilization time at reset (crystal) Oscillation stabilization time in software standby (crystal) External clock output stabilization delay time
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 437 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
tcyc tCH tCf
tCL
tCr
Figure 20.2 System Clock Timing
EXTAL tDEXT VCC tDEXT
STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1
Figure 20.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 438 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.3.2
Control Signal Timing
Table 20.5 lists the control signal timing. Table 20.5 Control Signal Timing Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (widerange specifications)
Symbol tRESS tRESW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW tIRQS tIRQH tIRQW Min. 200 20 150 10 200 150 10 200 Max. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns tcyc ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 20.5 Test Conditions Figure 20.4
Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time NMI hold time NMI pulse width (exiting software standby mode) IRQ setup time IRQ hold time IRQ pulse width (exiting software standby mode)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 439 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
tRESS RES tRESW
tRESS
Figure 20.4 Reset Input Timing
tNMIS NMI tNMIW tNMIH
IRQi
tIRQW tIRQS tIRQH
IRQ Edge input
tIRQS
IRQ Level input
Note: i = 0 to 2
Figure 20.5 Interrupt Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 440 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.3.3
Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Table 20.6 lists the timing of on-chip supporting modules. Table 20.6 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0, = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (widerange specifications)
Symbol Output data delay time tPWD Min. -- 30 30 -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 4 6 tSCKW tSCKr tSCKf tTXD tRXS tRXH 0.4 -- -- -- 50 50 Max. 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 50 -- -- ns Figure 20.10 tScyc tcyc tcyc Figure 20.9 ns tcyc Figure 20.8 ns Figure 20.7 Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 20.6
Item I/O port
Input data setup time tPRS Input data hold time TPU Timer output delay time tPRH tTOCD
Timer input setup time tTICS Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width SCI Input clock cycle Single edge Both edges tTCKS tTCKWH tTCKWL
Asynchro- tScyc nous Synchronous
Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 441 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Item A/D Trigger input setup converter time PPG Pulse output delay time
Symbol tTRGS tPOD
Min. 30 --
Max. -- 50
Unit ns ns
Test Conditions Figure 20.11 Figure 20.12
T1
T2
tPRS Ports 1, 4, 9 A to D, F (read)
tPWD tPRH
Ports 1, A to D, F (write)
Figure 20.6 I/O Port Input/Output Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 442 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
tTOCD
Output compare output*
tTICS
Input capture input*
Note: * TIOCA0 to TIOCA5, TIOCB0 to TIOCB5, TIOCC0, TIOCC3, TIOCD0, TIOCD3
Figure 20.7 TPU Input/Output Timing
tTCKS TCLKA to TCLKD tTCKWL tTCKWH tTCKS
Figure 20.8 TPU Clock Input Timing
tSCKW SCK0 to SCK2 tScyc tSCKr tSCKf
Figure 20.9 SCK Clock Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 443 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
SCK0 to SCK2
tTXD TxD0 to TxD2 (transmit data)
tRXS tRXH
RxD0 to RxD2 (receive data)
Figure 20.10 SCI Input/Output Timing (Clock Synchronous Mode)
tTRGS ADTRG
Figure 20.11 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing
tPOD PO15 to 8
Figure 20.12 PPG Output Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 444 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.4
A/D Conversion Characteristics
Table 20.7 lists the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 20.7 A/D Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (widerange specifications)
Min. 10 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ. 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.5 -- Max. 10 200 20 5 3.5 3.5 3.5 -- 4.0 Unit bits s pF k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB
Item Resolution Conversion time Analog input capacitance Permissible signal-source impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization Absolute accuracy
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 445 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.5
Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 20.8 lists the flash memory characteristics. Table 20.8 Flash Memory Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = 0 to +75C (Programming/erasing operating temperature range)
Symbol Min. tP tE NWEC
1
Item
124 Programming time* * *
Typ. 10 100 -- 1 50 30 200 10
Max. 200 1200 100 -- -- 32 202 12
Unit ms/ 128 bytes ms/block times s s s s s
Test Condition
-- -- -- 1 50 28 198 8
135 Erase time* * *
Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after SWE bit setting* 1 Wait time after PSU bit setting*
14 Wait time after P bit setting* *
tsswe tspsu tsp30 tsp200 tsp10
Programming time wait Programming time wait Additionalprogramming time wait
Wait time after P bit clear*
1
tcp tcpsu tspv
1 1
5 5 4 2 2 100 -- 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 12
5 5 4 2 2 100 -- 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 --
-- -- -- -- -- -- 1000 -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 120
s s s s s s times s s ms s s s s s s times Erase time wait
1 Wait time after PSU bit clear*
Wait time after PV bit setting*
Wait time after H'FF dummy write* 1 Wait time after PV bit clear* Wait time after SWE bit clear* 14 Maximum programming count* *
1
tspvr tcpv tcswe N tsswe tsesu tse tce tcesu tsev tsevr tcev tcswe N
Erase
1 Wait time after SWE bit setting*
Wait time after ESU bit setting* 15 Wait time after E bit setting* * Wait time after E bit clear*
1
1
1 Wait time after ESU bit clear*
Wait time after EV bit setting* Wait time after EV bit clear*
1
1
1 Wait time after H'FF dummy write*
Wait time after SWE bit clear* 15 Maximum erase count* *
1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 446 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Notes: 1. Make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify flowchart or erase/erase-verify flowchart. 2. Programming time per 128 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR1) is set. It does not include the programming verification time.) 3. Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit FLMCR1 is set. It does not include the erase verification time.) 4. To specify the maximum programming time value (tp (max.)) in the 128-bytes programming algorithm, set the max. value (1000) for the maximum programming count (N). The wait time after P bit setting should be changed as follows according to the value of the programming counter (n). Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6: tsp30 = 30 s Programming counter (n) = 7 to 1000: tsp200 = 200 s [In additional programming] Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6: tsp10 = 10 s 5. For the maximum erase time (tE (max.)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after E bit setting (tse) and the maximum erase count (N): tE (max.) = Wait time after E bit setting (tse) x maximum erase count (N) To set the maximum erase time, the values of (tse) and (N) should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. Examples: When tse = 100 ms, N = 12 times When tse = 10 ms, N = 120 times
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 447 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 448 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Appendix
Appendix
A. I/O Port States in Each Pin State
MCU Operating Mode 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Hardware Standby Mode T T T T T T T T Software Standby Mode Keep T T Keep Keep Keep Keep [DDR = 0] T [DDR = 1] H PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0 [Legend] H: High level T: High impedance Keep: Input port becomes high-impedance, output port retains state 7 T T Keep Program Execution State Sleep Mode I/O port Input port Input port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port [DDR = 0] T [DDR = 1] Clock output I/O port
Port Name Port 1 Port 4 Port 9 Port A Port B Port C Port D PF7
Reset T T T T T T T T
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 449 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Appendix
B.
Product Code Lineup
Product Code Mark Code HD64F2602 HD64F2602FC20 (Normal spec) HD64F2602FC20W (Wide Temperature Range spec) HD64F2602FC20V (Normal spec) HD64F2602FC20WV (Wide Temperature Range spec) Mask ROM version HD6432602 HD6432602(***)FC (Normal spec) HD6432602(***)FCW (Wide Temperature Range spec) HD6432602(***)FCV (Normal spec) HD6432602(***)FCWV (Wide Temperature Range spec) HD6432601 HD6432601(***)FC (Normal spec) HD6432601(***)FCW (Wide Temperature Range spec) HD6432601(***)FCV (Normal spec) HD6432601(***)FCWV (Wide Temperature Range spec) Package (Renesas Package Code) 80-pin QFP PRQP0080JD-A (FP-80Q/FP-80QV)
Product Type H8S/2602 group F-ZTAT version
[Legend] (***): ROM code
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 450 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Appendix
C.
Package Dimensions
JEITA Package Code P-QFP80-14x14-0.65 RENESAS Code PRQP0080JD-A Previous Code FP-80Q/FP-80QV MASS[Typ.] 1.2g
HD
*1
D
NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. 41
60
61
40 bp b1
c1
Reference Symbol
Dimension in Millimeters Min Nom 14 14 2.70 17.0 17.0 17.2 17.2 17.4 17.4 3.05 0.00 0.24 0.10 0.32 0.30 0.12 0.17 0.15 0 0.65 0.12 0.10 0.83 0.83 0.6 0.8 1.6 1.0 8 0.22 0.25 0.40 Max
HE
E
c
D E A2
*2
Terminal cross section
ZE
HD HE A A1 bp
80
21
1 ZD
20
A2
b1 c
c
F
c1
A
A1
e x y ZD ZE L L1
L L1
Detail F
e
*3
y
bp
x
M
Figure C.1 Package Dimensions
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 451 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Appendix
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 452 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Index
Numerics
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) ................. 155
C
Cascaded operation ................................. 205 Chain transfer.................................. 113, 119 Clock pulse generator ............................. 389 Condition field .......................................... 36 Condition-code register (CCR) ................. 20 Conversion time ...................................... 353 CPU operating modes ............................... 12
A
A/D converter ......................................... 345 A/D converter activation......................... 221 A/D trigger input .................................... 152 Absolute address....................................... 38 Activation by software............................ 117 Address map ............................................. 49 Address space ........................................... 16 Addressing modes..................................... 37 ADI ......................................................... 355 Advanced mode ........................................ 14 Arithmetic operations instructions............ 28 Asynchronous mode ............................... 298
D
Data direction register............................. 123 Data register............................................ 123 Data transfer controller ............................. 97 Data transfer instructions .......................... 27 DTC vector table..................................... 105
B
Bcc...................................................... 25, 33 Bit manipulation instructions.................... 31 Bit rate .................................................... 291 Block data transfer instructions ................ 35 Block transfer mode................................ 111 Boot mode .............................................. 376 Branch instructions ................................... 33 Break....................................................... 338 Break address...................................... 83, 87 Break conditions ....................................... 87 Buffer operation...................................... 201 Bus arbitration .......................................... 94 Bus cycle .................................................. 93 Bus masters............................................... 94
E
Effective address................................. 37, 41 Effective address extension....................... 36 Emulation................................................ 380 Erase/erase-verify ................................... 384 Erasing units ........................................... 370 Exception handling ................................... 51 Exception handling vector table................ 52 Extended control register (EXR)............... 19 External trigger ....................................... 355
F
Framing error .......................................... 305 Free-running count operation.................. 194
G
General registers ....................................... 18
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 453 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
I
Immediate ................................................. 39 Input capture........................................... 197 Input pull-up MOS ................................. 123 Instruction set ........................................... 25 Interrupt control modes ............................ 73 Interrupt controller.................................... 61 Interrupt exception handling vector table ................................ 70 Interrupt mask bit ..................................... 20 Interrupt mask level .................................. 19 Interrupt priority register (IPR) ................ 61 Interrupts .................................................. 57 Interval timer mode ................................ 268
Output trigger.......................................... 249 Overflows ............................................... 268 Overrun error .......................................... 305
P
Parity error .............................................. 305 PC break controller ................................... 83 Periodic count operation ......................... 194 Phase counting mode .............................. 212 Pin arrangement .......................................... 3 PLL circuit .............................................. 395 Port register............................................. 123 Power-down states .................................. 387 Program counter (PC) ............................... 19 Program/erase protection ........................ 386 Program/program-verify ......................... 382 Program-counter relative .......................... 39 Programmable pulse generator ............... 241 Programmer mode................................... 387 Programming units.................................. 370 Programming/erasing in user program mode ......................................... 378 PWM modes ........................................... 207
L
Logic operations instructions.................... 30
M
MAC instruction....................................... 47 Mark state ............................................... 338 Memory cycle........................................... 93 Memory indirect ....................................... 40 Multiply-accumulate register (MAC) ....... 21
R
Register direct ........................................... 37 Register field............................................. 36 Register indirect........................................ 37 Register indirect with displacement.......... 38 Register indirect with post-increment ....... 38 Register indirect with pre-decrement........ 38 Register information ............................... 105 Registers ADCR ......................... 351, 421, 426, 430 ADCSR ....................... 349, 421, 426, 430 ADDR ......................... 348, 421, 426, 430 BARA ........................... 85, 416, 422, 427 BARB ........................... 85, 416, 422, 427
N
NMI .................................................... 69, 82 Non-overlapping pulse output ................ 255 Normal mode ............................ 12, 109, 118
O
On-board programming .......................... 375 Open-drain control register..................... 123 Operating mode selection ......................... 45 Operation field.......................................... 36
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 454 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
BCRA ........................... 86, 416, 422, 427 BCRB ........................... 86, 416, 422, 427 BRR ............................ 291, 420, 425, 430 CRA.................................................... 101 CRB .................................................... 102 DAR.................................................... 101 DTCER ....................... 102, 416, 422, 427 DTVECR .................... 103, 416, 422, 427 EBR1 .......................... 373, 421, 426, 430 EBR2 .......................... 374, 421, 426, 430 FLMCR1..................... 371, 421, 426, 430 FLMCR2..................... 373, 421, 426, 430 IER................................ 65, 416, 422, 427 IPR................................ 64, 418, 424, 428 ISCR ............................. 66, 416, 422, 427 ISR................................ 68, 416, 422, 427 LPWRCR.................... 391, 416, 422, 427 MDCR .......................... 46, 416, 422, 427 MRA ................................................... 100 MRB ................................................... 101 MSTPCR .................... 404, 416, 422, 427 NDER ......................... 244, 416, 422, 427 NDR............................ 246, 416, 422, 427 P1DDR ....................... 126, 417, 423, 427 P1DR .......................... 127, 419, 424, 429 PADDR....................... 133, 417, 423, 427 PADR ......................... 134, 419, 424, 429 PAODR....................... 135, 417, 423, 427 PAPCR ....................... 135, 417, 423, 427 PBDDR....................... 137, 417, 423, 427 PBDR.......................... 138, 419, 424, 429 PBODR....................... 139, 417, 423, 428 PBPCR........................ 139, 417, 423, 427 PCDDR....................... 143, 417, 423, 427 PCDR.......................... 144, 419, 424, 429 PCODR....................... 145, 417, 423, 428 PCPCR........................ 145, 417, 423, 427 PCR............................. 249, 416, 422, 427 PDDDR....................... 148, 417, 423, 427 PDDR ......................... 148, 419, 424, 429
PDPCR........................ 149, 417, 423, 427 PFDDR........................ 150, 417, 423, 427 PFDR .......................... 151, 419, 424, 429 PMR ............................ 250, 416, 422, 427 PODR.......................... 245, 416, 422, 427 PORT1 ........................ 127, 421, 426, 430 PORT4 ........................ 131, 421, 426, 430 PORT9 ........................ 132, 421, 426, 430 PORTA ....................... 134, 421, 426, 431 PORTB........................ 138, 421, 426, 431 PORTC........................ 144, 421, 426, 431 PORTD ....................... 149, 421, 426, 431 PORTF ........................ 151, 421, 426, 431 RAMER ...................... 374, 419, 424, 429 RDR ............................ 276, 420, 425, 430 RSR..................................................... 276 RSTCSR...................... 267, 420, 425, 430 SAR..................................................... 101 SBYCR ....................... 402, 416, 422, 427 SCKCR ....................... 390, 416, 422, 427 SCMR ......................... 290, 420, 425, 430 SCR............................. 281, 420, 425, 430 SMR ............................ 277, 420, 425, 430 SSR ............................. 284, 420, 425, 430 SYSCR.......................... 47, 416, 422, 427 TCNT .......... 191, 264, 420, 425, 429, 430 TCR............................. 162, 419, 424, 429 TCSR .......................... 265, 420, 425, 430 TDR ............................ 276, 420, 425, 430 TGR .................... 191, 201, 419, 424, 429 TIER............................ 186, 419, 424, 429 TIOR ........................... 169, 419, 424, 429 TMDR......................... 167, 419, 424, 429 TSR ..................... 188, 276, 419, 424, 429 TSTR........................... 191, 418, 424, 428 TSYR .......................... 192, 418, 424, 428 Repeat mode ........................................... 110 Reset ......................................................... 53 Reset exception handling .......................... 53
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 455 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
S
Scan mode .............................................. 352 Serial communication interface .............. 273 Shift instructions....................................... 30 Single mode ............................................ 352 Software activation ......................... 114, 120 Stack pointer (SP)..................................... 18 Stack status ............................................... 59 SWDTEND............................................. 114 Synchronous operation ........................... 199 System control instructions ...................... 34
T
TCIU_1................................................... 220 TCIU_2................................................... 220 TCIU_4................................................... 220 TCIU_5................................................... 220 TCIV_0................................................... 220 TCIV_1................................................... 220 TCIV_2................................................... 220 TCIV_3................................................... 220 TCIV_4................................................... 220 TCIV_5................................................... 220 TGIA_0 .................................................. 220 TGIA_1 .................................................. 220 TGIA_2 .................................................. 220 TGIA_3 .................................................. 220 TGIA_4 .................................................. 220
TGIA_5................................................... 220 TGIB_0 ................................................... 220 TGIB_1 ................................................... 220 TGIB_2 ................................................... 220 TGIB_3 ................................................... 220 TGIB_4 ................................................... 220 TGIB_5 ................................................... 220 TGIC_0 ................................................... 220 TGIC_3 ................................................... 220 TGID_0................................................... 220 TGID_3................................................... 220 Toggle output.......................................... 195 Trace bit .................................................... 19 Traces........................................................ 57 Trap instruction......................................... 58 TRAPA instruction ............................. 39, 58
V
Vector number for the software activation interrupt ............. 103
W
Watchdog timer....................................... 263 Waveform output by compare match...... 195 WOVI ..................................................... 269
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 21, 2008 Page 456 of 456 REJ09B0425-0100
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer Hardware Manual H8S/2602 Group
Publication Date: Rev.1.00, Jan. 21, 2008 Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div. Renesas Technology Corp. Edited by: Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div. Renesas Solutions Corp.
2008. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
RENESAS SALES OFFICES
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120 Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7858/7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2377-3473 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 3518-3399 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145
http://www.renesas.com
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510
Colophon 6.2
H8S/2602 Group Hardware Manual


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of HD64F2602

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  
[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]
 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X